670900

Lexmark MX610 Handleiding

304
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/345
Pagina verder
MX610, MX611, MX617
User's Guide
June 2017 www.lexmark.com
Machine type(s):
7016
Model(s):
630, 670, 675
Contents
Safety information.........................................................................................7
Conventions...........................................................................................................................................................7
Learning about the printer......................................................................... 10
Finding information about the printer...........................................................................................................10
Selecting a location for the printer................................................................................................................. 11
Printer configurations........................................................................................................................................12
Using the Embedded Web Server................................................................................................................. 14
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner................................................................................... 15
Using the ADF and scanner glass..................................................................................................................15
Understanding the printer control panel................................................. 16
Using the printer control panel.......................................................................................................................16
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights......................................................16
Understanding the home screen....................................................................................................................17
Using the touch-screen buttons.....................................................................................................................19
Setting up and using the home screen applications..............................21
Finding the IP address of the computer.......................................................................................................21
Finding the IP address of the printer.............................................................................................................21
Accessing the Embedded Web Server.........................................................................................................21
Customizing the home screen.......................................................................................................................22
Understanding the dierent applications................................................................................................... 22
Activating the home screen applications....................................................................................................23
Finding information about the home screen applications................................................................................ 23
Setting up Forms and Favorites .............................................................................................................................. 23
Setting up Card Copy................................................................................................................................................. 24
Using MyShortcut........................................................................................................................................................ 24
Setting up Multi Send.................................................................................................................................................25
Setting up Scan to Network......................................................................................................................................25
Setting up Remote Operator Panel.............................................................................................................. 26
Exporting and importing a configuration.....................................................................................................27
Additional printer setup.............................................................................28
Installing internal options................................................................................................................................ 28
Installing hardware options.............................................................................................................................44
Contents 2
Attaching cables................................................................................................................................................ 47
Setting up the printer software......................................................................................................................48
Networking..........................................................................................................................................................49
Verifying printer setup......................................................................................................................................53
Loading paper and specialty media.........................................................55
Setting the paper size and type.................................................................................................................... 55
Configuring Universal paper settings.......................................................................................................... 55
Loading trays......................................................................................................................................................55
Loading the multipurpose feeder................................................................................................................. 60
Using the standard bin and paper stop.......................................................................................................65
Linking and unlinking trays.............................................................................................................................66
Paper and specialty media guide............................................................. 69
Using specialty media......................................................................................................................................69
Paper guidelines................................................................................................................................................. 71
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights............................................................................................... 74
Printing.........................................................................................................78
Printing a document..........................................................................................................................................78
Printing from a mobile device........................................................................................................................ 79
Printing from a flash drive............................................................................................................................... 80
Printing confidential and other held jobs....................................................................................................82
Printing information pages..............................................................................................................................83
Canceling a print job........................................................................................................................................ 84
Copying........................................................................................................85
Making copies....................................................................................................................................................85
Copying photos................................................................................................................................................. 86
Copying on specialty media...........................................................................................................................86
Customizing copy settings..............................................................................................................................87
Placing information on copies........................................................................................................................93
Canceling a copy job........................................................................................................................................93
Understanding the copy options...................................................................................................................94
E-mailing...................................................................................................... 97
Setting up the printer to e-mail...................................................................................................................... 97
Creating an e-mail shortcut............................................................................................................................ 98
Contents 3
E-mailing a document...................................................................................................................................... 99
Customizing e-mail settings..........................................................................................................................100
Canceling an e-mail..........................................................................................................................................101
Understanding the e-mail options................................................................................................................101
Faxing......................................................................................................... 104
Setting up the printer to fax.......................................................................................................................... 104
Sending a fax......................................................................................................................................................117
Creating shortcuts............................................................................................................................................ 119
Customizing fax settings................................................................................................................................120
Canceling an outgoing fax............................................................................................................................. 121
Holding and forwarding faxes...................................................................................................................... 122
Understanding the fax options.....................................................................................................................123
Scanning.....................................................................................................125
Using Scan to Network...................................................................................................................................125
Scanning to an FTP address.........................................................................................................................125
Scanning to a computer or flash drive....................................................................................................... 127
Understanding the scan options................................................................................................................. 129
Understanding the printer menus.......................................................... 132
Menus list...........................................................................................................................................................132
Paper menu....................................................................................................................................................... 133
Reports menu....................................................................................................................................................143
Network/Ports menu....................................................................................................................................... 144
Security menu................................................................................................................................................... 157
Settings menu...................................................................................................................................................164
Help menu......................................................................................................................................................... 213
Saving money and the environment...................................................... 214
Saving paper and toner..................................................................................................................................214
Saving energy...................................................................................................................................................214
Recycling............................................................................................................................................................218
Securing the printer..................................................................................219
Statement of Volatility.....................................................................................................................................219
Erasing volatile memory.................................................................................................................................219
Erasing non‑volatile memory.......................................................................................................................220
Contents 4
Erasing printer hard disk memory..............................................................................................................220
Configuring printer hard disk encryption.................................................................................................. 221
Finding printer security information...........................................................................................................222
Maintaining the printer............................................................................223
Cleaning printer parts....................................................................................................................................223
Checking the status of parts and supplies...............................................................................................225
Estimated number of remaining pages.....................................................................................................225
Ordering supplies...........................................................................................................................................225
Storing supplies...............................................................................................................................................228
Replacing supplies......................................................................................................................................... 228
Moving the printer.......................................................................................................................................... 234
Managing the printer............................................................................... 236
Finding advanced networking and administrator information............................................................236
Checking the virtual display.........................................................................................................................236
Setting up e‑mail alerts................................................................................................................................. 236
Viewing reports............................................................................................................................................... 237
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server................................................... 237
Restoring factory default settings...............................................................................................................238
Clearing jams............................................................................................ 239
Avoiding jams.................................................................................................................................................. 239
Identifying jam locations...............................................................................................................................240
Paper jam in the automatic document feeder..........................................................................................241
Paper jam in the standard bin.......................................................................................................................241
Paper jam in the rear door............................................................................................................................242
Paper jam in the front door...........................................................................................................................243
Paper jam in the duplex unit........................................................................................................................ 245
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder.......................................................................................................246
Paper jam in trays............................................................................................................................................247
Paper jam in the finisher............................................................................................................................... 248
Staple jam in the finisher.............................................................................................................................. 250
Troubleshooting....................................................................................... 252
Understanding the printer messages........................................................................................................252
Solving printer problems...............................................................................................................................267
Contents 5
Solving print problems...................................................................................................................................275
Solving copy problems..................................................................................................................................302
Solving fax problems..................................................................................................................................... 306
Solving scanner problems.............................................................................................................................312
Solving home screen application problems..............................................................................................317
Embedded Web Server does not open..................................................................................................... 318
Contacting customer support.......................................................................................................................319
Notices.......................................................................................................320
Product information........................................................................................................................................320
Edition notice...................................................................................................................................................320
Power consumption....................................................................................................................................... 325
Index...........................................................................................................334
Contents 6
Safety information
Conventions
Note: A note identifies information that could help you.
Warning: A warning identifies something that could damage the product hardware or software.
CAUTION: A caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could injure you.
Dierent types of caution statements include:
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Indicates a risk of injury.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Indicates a risk of electrical shock.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: Indicates a risk of burn if touched.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Indicates a crush hazard.
CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: Indicates a risk of being caught between moving parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to
an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or UPS devices. The power capacity of these types of accessories can be easily
overloaded by a laser printer and may result in a risk of fire, property damage, or poor printer
performance.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not place or use this product near
water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those specified in the User’s Guide may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release
emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for
selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced.
There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble,
or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions
and local regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
Safety information 7
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
• Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.
• Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
• If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when passing over
thresholds and breaks in flooring.
• If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays, then lift the printer o the
trays. Do not try to lift the printer and the trays at the same time.
• Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the
options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
• Make sure that your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of
fire
or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of
fire,
use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, make sure that all external
connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked
plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of
specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer
is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power
cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects
such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect
the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet
before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted
configurations
require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Safety information 8
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information 9
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
• Connecting the printer
• Installing the printer software
Setup documentation—The setup documentation
came with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
• Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
• Loading paper
• Configuring printer settings
• Viewing and printing documents and photos
• Setting up and using the printer software
• Configuring the printer on a network
• Caring for and maintaining the printer
• Troubleshooting and solving problems
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The
guides are available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Note: These guides are also available in other
languages.
Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility
features of your printer
Lexmark Accessibility Guide—This guide is available
at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software
program or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
• The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending
on your operating system.
Learning about the printer 10
What are you looking for? Find it here
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
• Documentation
• Driver downloads
• Live chat support
• E‑mail support
• Voice support
Lexmark support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation
for your country or region can be found on the
support Web site or on the printed warranty that came
with your printer.
Record the following information (located on the
store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have
it ready when you contact customer support so that
they may serve you faster:
• Machine Type number
• Serial number
• Date purchased
• Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
• In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited
Warranty included with this printer, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
• In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with this printer.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to
install any options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical
Committee 156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust.
– Away from stray staples and paper clips.
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Learning about the printer 11
1
4
3
2
1
5
1 Right side 304.8 mm (12 in.)
2 Front 508 mm (20 in.)
3 Left side 203.2 mm (8 in.)
4 Rear 203.2 mm (8 in.)
5 Top 800 mm (31.49 in.)
Printer configurations
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Learning about the printer 12
Basic model
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 Display
2 Automatic document feeder (ADF)
3 ADF tray
4 ADF bin
5 Standard bin
6 Multipurpose feeder
7 Standard 550‑sheet tray
Note: A lockable 550‑sheet tray is also available. For more information, contact the place where you
purchased the printer.
Learning about the printer 13
Configured model
1
2
3
1
2
3
1 Optional 250‑sheet tray
2 Optional 550‑sheet tray
3 Optional stapler
Using the Embedded Web Server
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
If the printer is installed on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to do the following:
• View the virtual display of the printer control panel.
• Check the status of the printer supplies.
• Configure supply notifications.
• Configure printer settings.
• Configure network settings.
• View reports.
To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer:
1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
finding
the TCP/IP section
Notes:
– An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
– If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Learning about the printer 14
3 Press Enter.
The Embedded Web Server page appears.
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner
• Make quick copies or set the printer to perform
specific
copy jobs.
• Send a fax using the printer control panel.
• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, or an FTP destination.
• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).
Using the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book
pages, small items (such as postcards or photos),
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Using the ADF
When using the ADF:
• Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.
• Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
• Scan sizes from 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 inches) wide to 216 x 368 mm (8.5 x 14.5 inches) long.
• Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m
2
(14–32 lb).
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
When using the scanner glass:
• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
• Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) long.
• Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 inch) thick.
Learning about the printer 15
Understanding the printer control panel
Using the printer control panel
Use the To
1 Display
• View the printer status and messages.
• Set up and operate the printer.
2 Home button Go to the home screen.
3 Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:
• Press any hard button.
• Open a door or cover.
• Send a print job from the computer.
• Perform a power‑on reset (POR) with the main power switch.
• Attach a device to the USB port on the printer.
4 Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5 Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
6 Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
7 Cancel button Stop all printer activity.
8 Clear All / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as printing, copying, or e-mailing.
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and
indicator lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status
or condition.
Indicator light Printer status
O The printer is o or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Understanding the printer control panel 16
Indicator light Printer status
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light Printer status
O The printer is o, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely o for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the
home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu
screen; or to respond to messages.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded solutions.
Touch To
1 Change Language Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that lets you change the primary
language of the printer.
2 Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
3 Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
4 E-mail Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
5 FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP
server.
6 Arrows Scroll up or down.
7 Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms.
Understanding the printer control panel 17
Touch To
8 Menu icon Access the printer menus.
Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.
9 Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and
file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not
from any other application.
10 USB Drive View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory
card or flash drive is connected to the printer.
11 Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
12 Status/Supplies
• Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to
continue processing.
• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to
clear it.
13 Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
14 Search held jobs Search for one or more of the following items:
• User name for held or confidential print jobs
• Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
•
Profile
names
• Bookmark container or print job names
• USB container or print job names for supported
file
types
Features
Feature Description
Menu trail line
Example:
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >
Number of Copies
A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows
the path taken to arrive at the current menu.
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen. If you
touch an underlined word on the “Number of Copies” screen before the
number of copies is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does
not become the default setting.
Attendance message alert
If an attendance message aects a function, then this icon appears and the
red indicator light blinks.
Warning
If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Understanding the printer control panel 18
Feature Description
Status message bar
• Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Printer IP address
Example:
123.123.123.123
The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of
the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods.
You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so
you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not
physically near the printer.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization
settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
7
6
3
4
1
5
2
Touch To
1 Arrows View a list of options.
2 Copy It Print a copy.
3 Advanced Options Select a copy option.
4 Home Go to the home screen.
5 Increase Select a higher value.
6 Decrease Select a lower value.
7 Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
Understanding the printer control panel 19
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch To
Accept
Save a setting.
Cancel
• Cancel an action or a selection.
• Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset
Reset values on the screen.
Understanding the printer control panel 20
Setting up and using the home screen
applications
Notes:
• Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active applications. Some applications are supported only in some printer models.
• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, go to
http://support.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Finding the IP address of the computer
For Windows users
1 In the Run dialog box, type cmd to open the command prompt.
2 Type ipconfig, and then look for the IP address.
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, select Network.
2 Select your connection type, and then click Advanced > TCP/IP.
3 Look for the IP address.
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings
even when you are not physically near the printer.
1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the printer control panel home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 21
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3 Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Customizing the home screen
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Do one or more of the following:
• Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
a Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home
screen.
c Click Submit.
• Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home
screen applications” on page 23 or see the documentation that came with the application.
Understanding the dierent applications
Use To
Card Copy Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see
“Setting up
Card Copy” on page 24.
Fax Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see
“Faxing” on
page 104.
Forms and
Favorites
Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For
more information, see
“Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 23.
Multi Send Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see
“Setting
up Multi Send” on page 25.
MyShortcut Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see
“Using
MyShortcut” on page 24.
Scan to E‑mail Scan a document, and then send it to an e‑mail address. For more information, see
“E-mailing”
on page 97.
Scan to Computer Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more
information, see
“Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 128.
Scan to FTP Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see
“Scanning to an FTP address” on page 125.
Scan to Network Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see
“Setting up Scan to Network” on page 25.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 22
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you
must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on
accessing the Embedded Web Server, see
“Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 21.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com.
2 Click Software Solutions, and then select either of the following:
• Scan to Network—This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application.
• Other Applications—This lets you
find
information about the other applications.
3 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms
directly from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site
where the bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing,
security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the
documentation that came with your operating system.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3 Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the
host computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see
“Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 21.
• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 23
Setting up Card Copy
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet‑size cards.
You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the
information on the card in a more convenient manner.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.
3 Change the default scanning options, if necessary.
• Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
• Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the
application is used.
• Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy
of the scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast
automatically.
• Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full
size).
• Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.
Notes:
– When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and
400 dpi for black and white.
– When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color,
and 300 dpi for black and white.
• Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.
Using MyShortcut
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 24
Use To
Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax,
or e-mail jobs.
To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.
Setting up Multi Send
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.
Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3 From the
Profiles
section, click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse‑over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the
destination are correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified
destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see
“Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 21.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.
Setting up Scan to Network
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 25
Use To
Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder
destinations.
Notes:
• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where
the destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer
at least a write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating
system.
• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Do either of the following:
• Click Set up Scan to Network > Click here.
• Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the
host computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP
address of the host computer, see
“Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 21.
• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on
the printer display.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near
the network printer. From your computer, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create
bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3 Select the Enable check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 26
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export
configuration
settings into a text
file,
and then import the
file
to apply the settings to other
printers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
a Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
b From the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
c Click Configure, and then do either of the following:
• To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer
screen to save the configuration file.
Notes:
– When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
– If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration
file
is saved.
• To import a
configuration
from a
file,
click Import, and then browse to the saved
configuration
file
that was exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:
– Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
– If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click
Apply.
3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:
a Click Settings > Import/Export.
b Do either of the following:
• To export a
configuration
file,
click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the
instructions on the computer screen to save the
configuration
file.
• To import a
configuration
file,
do the following:
1 Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved
configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2 Click Submit.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 27
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Available internal options
• Memory card
– DDR3 DIMM
– Flash memory
• Fonts
• Firmware
Forms Barcode
Prescribe
IPDS
Printcryption
• Printer hard disk
• Lexmark
TM
Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
– Parallel 1284‑B interface
– MarkNet N8130
10/100 fiber
interface
– MarkNet N8350 802.11 b/g/n Wireless Print Server
– RS‑232‑C serial interface
Additional printer setup 28
Accessing the controller board
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer
o,
and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1 Open the controller board access door.
2 Open the controller board shield using the green handle.
2
1
3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic
components or connectors.
Additional printer setup 29
1 Memory card connector
2 Option card connector
3 Printer hard disk connector
4 Lexmark Internal Solutions Port connector
4 Close the shield, and then the access door.
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
Note: An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the controller board” on page 29.
2 Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so
may cause damage.
Additional printer setup 30
3 Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
1
2
4 Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall
until it clicks into place.
5 Close the controller board shield, and then the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add
the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding
available options in the print driver” on page 48.
Additional printer setup 31
Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer
o,
and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the controller board” on page 29.
2 Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so
may cause damage.
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
Additional printer setup 32
4 Push the card firmly into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush with the controller board.
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer
o,
and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 33
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
1 Open the controller board access door.
2 Lightly press the stop on the left side of the access door, and then slide the access door to remove it.
3
1
2
3 Unpack the ISP kit.
Note: Make sure to remove and discard the small cable attached to the white connector.
Additional printer setup 34
1 ISP solution
2 Screw to attach the ISP to the bracket
3 ISP exterior cover
4 Screws to attach the ISP metal bracket to the printer cage
5 Plastic bracket
6 Long ISP cable
4 Place the plastic bracket inside the ISP exterior cover until it clicks into place.
5 Slide and push the ISP solution into the plastic bracket.
1
2
Additional printer setup 35
6 Secure the ISP solution to the plastic bracket using the long screw.
7 Tighten the two screws on the end of the ISP solution.
Additional printer setup 36
8 Attach the white plug of the ISP solution interface cable into the white receptacle on the ISP.
9 Attach the ISP exterior cover at an angle by inserting the left hinges
first.
Additional printer setup 37
10 Lower the rest of the cover, and then slide the cover to the right.
11 Run the ISP cable through the controller board shield.
Additional printer setup 38
12 Open the shield using the green handle.
2
1
13 Attach the blue plug of the ISP solution interface cable into the blue receptacle on the controller board.
Note: If you have installed a printer hard disk, then you need to remove it. For more information, see
“Removing a printer hard disk” on page 43. To reinstall the printer hard disk, see “Installing a printer
hard disk” on page 40.
Additional printer setup 39
14 Close the shield.
15 Close the ISP exterior cover.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually
add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding
available options in the print driver” on page 48.
Installing a printer hard disk
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the controller board” on page 29.
2 Unpack the printer hard disk.
3 Install the printer hard disk on the controller board.
Warning—Potential Damage: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or
press on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.
Additional printer setup 40
a Using a flat‑head screwdriver, loosen the screws.
b Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plug and the receptacle are color‑coded blue.
Additional printer setup 41
c Align the screws on the printer hard disk to the slots on the controller board bracket, and then slide the
printer hard disk onto the brackets.
d Tighten the two screws.
4 Close the controller board shield, and then close the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add
the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding
available options in the print driver” on page 48.
Additional printer setup 42
Removing a printer hard disk
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 29.
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
2 Loosen the screws that connect the printer hard disk to the controller board bracket.
3 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the receptacle in the controller board, leaving the cable
attached to the printer hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable
to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out.
4 Hold the printer hard disk by the edges, and then remove it from the printer.
5 Close the controller board shield, and then close the access door.
Additional printer setup 43
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer
o,
and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order:
• Printer stand
• Optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
• Printer
For more information on installing a printer stand, optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray, or spacer, see the setup
sheet that came with the option.
Installing optional trays
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted
configurations
require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture.
For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1 Turn o the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Additional printer setup 44
2
1
2 Unpack the tray, and then remove all packing material.
3 Pull out the tray from the base.
2
4 Remove any packing material from inside the tray.
5 Insert the tray into the base.
6 Place the tray near the printer.
7 Align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower the printer into place.
Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.
Additional printer setup 45
1
2
8 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the
printer.
1
2
Notes:
• When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding
available options in the print driver” on page 48.
• To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the
printer until it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the
bottom.
Additional printer setup 46
Attaching cables
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to
an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of
fire,
use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the USB cable, any
wireless network adapter, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing.
1
2
3
6
8
7
4
5
Use the To
1 Power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
2 Power switch Turn on or turn o the printer.
3 Ethernet port Connect the printer to an Ethernet network.
4 EXT port Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and the
telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and
if this connection method is supported in your country or region.
Note: Remove the adapter plug to access the port.
Additional printer setup 47
Use the To
5 LINE port Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack (RJ‑11), DSL
filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line
to send and receive faxes.
6 USB port Attach a keyboard or any compatible option.
7 USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer.
8 Security slot Attach a lock to secure the printer in place.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the software CD that came with your printer.
• Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then select your printer and operating system.
2 Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3 For Macintosh users, add the printer.
Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
Adding available options in the print driver
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
2 Select the printer you want to update, and then do the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
3 Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4 Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2 Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
3 Apply the changes.
Additional printer setup 48
Networking
Notes:
• Purchase a MarkNet
TM
N8350 wireless network adapter before setting up the printer on a wireless
network. For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the instruction sheet that came
with the adapter.
• A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP),
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X-RADIUS are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you
begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing
the printer.
• A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
• The network gateway
• The network mask
• A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can
choose to use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer
can physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems
caused by a damaged cable.
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
• Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if
you are not sure which channel to select.
Additional printer setup 49
• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the
key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must
be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate
on the network.
– 802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
• Authentication type
• Inner authentication type
• 802.1X user name and password
• Certificates
– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:
– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless
utility of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID
or the security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access
point, or contact your system support person.
– To
find
the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation
that came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or
consult your system support person.
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:
• A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
• Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit
Note: Make sure to turn
o
the printer, then wait for at least
five
seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
2 Select a wireless connection setup.
Additional printer setup 50
Use To
Search for networks Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.
3 Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Before you begin, make sure that:
• The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
• A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
Using the Push Button Configuration method
1
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup >
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start Push Button Method
2 Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup >
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start PIN Method
2 Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
3 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:
• The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4 Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access
point.
5 Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.
Additional printer setup 51
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web
Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
• Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
• A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network
mode, and channel.
4 Click Submit.
5 Turn o the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then
turn the printer back on.
6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.
Changing port settings after installing an internal solutions port
Notes:
• If the printer has a static IP address, then do not change the configuration.
• If the computers are configured to use the network name instead of an IP address, then do not change
the configuration.
• If you are adding a wireless internal solutions port (ISP) to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet
connection, then disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network.
For Windows users
1
Open the printers folder.
2 From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP, open the printer properties.
3 Configure the port from the list.
4 Update the IP address.
5 Apply the changes.
Additional printer setup 52
For Macintosh users
1
From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to the list of printers, and then select + > IP.
2 Type the IP address in the address
field.
3 Apply the changes.
Setting up serial printing (Windows only)
1 Set the parameters in the printer.
a From the control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
b Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
c Apply the changes.
2 From your computer, open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
3 Open the printer properties, and then select the COM port from the list.
4 Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager.
Notes:
• Serial printing reduces printing speed.
• Make sure that the serial cable is connected to the serial port on your printer.
Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set
up correctly by printing the following:
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed
options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed
correctly. Remove the option, and then install it again.
• Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then
print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information
that aids network printing configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Additional printer setup 53
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This
page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2 Check the
first
section of the network setup page, and
confirm
that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be
malfunctioning. Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Additional printer setup 54
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can
aect
how reliably documents print. For more
information, see
“Avoiding jams” on page 239 and “Storing paper” on page 73.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit
Notes:
• The Paper Size setting is automatically set according to the position of the paper guides in each tray
except the standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1) and the multipurpose feeder.
• The Paper Size setting for Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder must be set manually in the Paper Size
menu.
• The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper.
• The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays.
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the
printer menus.
Notes:
• The smallest supported Universal size is 76.2 x 76.2 mm (3 x 3 inches).
• The largest supported Universal size is 215.9 x 359.92 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches).
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select the unit of measure >
2 To uc h Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3 Select the width or height, and then touch .
Loading trays
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull out the tray completely.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the printer display. Doing so may
cause a jam.
Loading paper and specialty media 55
1
2 Squeeze, and then slide the width guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.
Loading paper and specialty media 56
3 Squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.
A4
LTR
EXEC
B5
A5
LTR
LG L
A4
EXEC
B5
A5
A6
1
2
Notes:
• For some paper sizes like letter, legal, and A4, squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab
backward to accommodate their length.
• When loading legal‑size paper, the length guide extends beyond the base leaving the paper exposed
to dust. To protect the paper from dust, you can purchase a dust cover separately. For more
information, contact customer support.
• If you are loading A6-size paper in the standard tray, squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab
toward the center of the tray to the A6‑size position.
• Make sure the width and length guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the bottom of
the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media 57
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
• There are dierent ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is
installed or not, and whether two sided printing is needed.
Loading paper and specialty media 58
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
One‑sided printing
One‑sided printing
Two‑sided (duplex) printing Two‑sided (duplex) printing
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width guide.
Overfilling may cause paper jams.
Loading paper and specialty media 59
6 Insert the tray.
7 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and paper type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
Use the multipurpose feeder when printing on dierent paper sizes and types or specialty media, such as card
stock, transparencies, paper labels, and envelopes. You can also use it for single‑page print jobs on letterhead.
1 Open the multipurpose feeder.
Loading paper and specialty media 60
a Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
b Pull the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
Loading paper and specialty media 61
2 Squeeze the tab on the left width guide, and then move the guides for the paper you are loading.
3 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
• Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
• Hold transparencies by the edges. Flex the stack of transparencies back and forth to loosen them, and
then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
• Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on
a level surface.
4 Load the paper or specialty media.
Loading paper and specialty media 62
Notes:
• Do not force paper or specialty media into the multipurpose feeder.
• Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the
paper guides.
Overfilling
may cause paper jams.
• Load paper, transparencies, and card stock with the recommended printable side faceup and the top
edge entering the printer first. For more information on loading transparencies, see the packaging that
the transparencies came in.
Note: When loading A6‑size paper, make sure the multipurpose feeder extender rests lightly against
the edge of the paper so that the last few sheets of paper remain in place.
Loading paper and specialty media 63
• Load letterhead faceup with the top edge entering the printer first. For two‑sided (duplex) printing, load
letterhead facedown with the bottom edge entering the printer first.
Loading paper and specialty media 64
• Load envelopes with the flap on the left side facedown.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated
linings, or self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
5 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper or
specialty media loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Using the standard bin and paper stop
The standard bin holds up to 150 sheets of 20‑lb paper. It collects prints facedown. The standard bin includes
a paper stop that keeps paper from sliding out the front of the bin as it stacks.
To open the paper stop, pull it so that it flips forward.
Note: Close the paper stop when moving the printer to another location.
Loading paper and specialty media 65
Linking and unlinking trays
The printer links trays when the
specified
paper size and type are the same. When a linked tray becomes empty,
paper feeds from the next linked tray. To prevent trays from linking, assign a unique custom paper type name.
Linking and unlinking trays
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4 Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more
information, see
“Setting the paper size and type” on page 55.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the
printer. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the
specified
paper type. Printing issues may occur
if settings are not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4 Click Submit.
5 Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Loading paper and specialty media 66
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
3 Tou ch .
4 Tou ch Custom Types, and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑
defined
custom names.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3 Tou ch .
Configuring a custom name
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Loading paper and specialty media 67
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom name you want to configure, then select a paper or specialty media type, and then click
Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2 Select a custom name you want to configure, and then touch .
Loading paper and specialty media 68
Paper and specialty media guide
Using specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
• Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Before loading letterhead, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:
– “Loading trays” on page 55
– “Loading the multipurpose feeder” on page 60
Tips on using transparencies
• Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Feed transparencies from the standard tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand
temperatures up to 185°C (365°F) without melting, discoloring,
osetting,
or releasing hazardous emissions.
Note: If the transparency weight is set to Heavy and the transparency texture is set to Rough in the Paper
menu, then transparencies can be printed at a temperature up to 195°C (383°F).
• Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
• Before loading transparencies, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure
that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling
excessively, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m
2
(24‑lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All‑cotton
envelopes must not exceed 75‑g/m
2
(20‑lb bond) weight.
• Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have any exposed adhesive when the
flap
is in the sealed or closed position
Paper and specialty media guide 69
– Have bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal
envelopes.
Tips on using labels
Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Note: Use only paper label sheets. Vinyl, pharmacy, and two‑sided labels are not supported.
For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available
at
http://support.lexmark.com.
When printing on labels:
• Use labels designed
specifically
for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling,
or releasing hazardous emissions.
– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25‑psi (172‑kPa) pressure
without delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel o during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial
sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner
cartridge warranties.
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die‑cuts of
the label.
• Make sure the adhesive backing does not reach to the edge of the sheet. Zone coating of the adhesive
should be at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and
could void the warranty.
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, then remove a 2‑mm (0.06‑inches) strip on the leading and
driver edge, and use a non‑oozing adhesive.
• Portrait orientation is recommended, especially when printing bar codes.
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content,
thickness, and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered
for use before buying large quantities.
• From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Card Stock.
• Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly aect the print quality and cause jams
or other paper handling problems.
• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220°C
(446°F) without releasing hazardous emissions.
Paper and specialty media guide 70
• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting
introduces semi‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.
• Use grain short card stock when possible.
Paper guidelines
Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample
of the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics aect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when
evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
The standard printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 90‑g/m
2
(24‑lb) bond grain long paper.
The optional trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 120‑g/m
2
(32‑lb) bond grain long paper. The
multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights up to 163‑g/m
2
(43‑lb) bond grain long paper. Paper
lighter than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb) might not be sti enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use
75‑g/m
2
(20‑lb) bond grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches), it is recommended
to use 90 g/m
2
(24 lb) or heavier paper.
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported only for 60–90‑g/m
2
(16–24‑lb) bond paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can
occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper
unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to
printing and can cause feeding problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly
aects
print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper
is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300
Sheeld points; smoothness between 150–250 Sheeld points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper aects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes
that can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for
24–48 hours before printing. Extend the time to several days if the storage or transportation environment is
very dierent from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper
fibers
in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length
of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
Paper and specialty media guide 71
For 60–90‑g/m
2
(16–24‑lb) bond paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides
the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality.
Paper containing
fibers
such as cotton can negatively
aect
paper handling.
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically‑treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers,
carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be aected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater or lesser than
+/‑2.5 mm (+/‑0.10 inch), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms:
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
• Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb)
• Multiple‑part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually
indicated on the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are
specifically
designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
• Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m
2
(16 to 24 lb) weight paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an oset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Paper and specialty media guide 72
Use papers printed with heat‑resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to
withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that
are not aected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these requirements;
latex inks might not. When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without
melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
Using recycled paper and other
oce
papers
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled oce paper produced
specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government
a study demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper.
However, no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.
Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of
test paper from around the world, using chamber tests for dierent temperature and humidity conditions.
Lexmark has found no reason to discourage the use of today's recycled oce papers, but generally the following
property guidelines apply to recycled paper.
• Low moisture content (4–5%)
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheeld units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheeld units) and
much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheeld units) have been engineered
to work very well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your
paper supplier.
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coecient of friction (0.4–0.6)
•
Sucient
bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m
2
[16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and
paper that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is
required for reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing,
consult your paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these
guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively
under normal printing conditions).
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent.
Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative
humidity between 40 and 60 percent.
• Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
• Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and
wrapper help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Paper and specialty media guide 73
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
Supported paper sizes
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
550‑sheet tray
Optional 250‑
or 550‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
ADF Scanner
glass
Duplex
printing
Business card X X X X
X
3 x 5 X X
1
X X
4 x 6 X X
1
X X
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 in.)
A5
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in.)
X
A6
105 x 148 mm
(4.13 x 5.83 in.)
X X
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.1 in.)
X
Letter
215.9 x 279.4 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive
184.2 x 266.7 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 in.)
X
Oficio (México)
215.9 x 340.4 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio
215.9 x 330.2 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
1
Paper is supported only if the paper size setting is set to Universal.
2
Paper is supported in two‑sided (duplex) printing only if the width is at least 210 mm (8.27 in.) and the length is at
least 279.4 mm (11 in.). The smallest supported Universal paper size is supported only in the multipurpose feeder.
Paper and specialty media guide 74
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
550‑sheet tray
Optional 250‑
or 550‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
ADF Scanner
glass
Duplex
printing
Statement
139.7 x 215.9 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
X
Universal
2
76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)
to 215.9 x 359.92 mm
(8.5 x 14.17 in.)
2
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98.4 x 190.5 mm
(3.875 x 7.5 in.)
XX
X X
9 Envelope
98.4 x 226.1 mm
(3.875 x 8.9 in.)
XX
X X
10 Envelope
104.8 x 241.3 mm
(4.12 x 9.5 in.)
XX
X X
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.33 x 8.66 in.)
XX
X X
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
XX
X X
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
XX
X X
Other Envelope
85.7 x 165 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(3.375 x 6.50 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
XX
X X
1
Paper is supported only if the paper size setting is set to Universal.
2
Paper is supported in two‑sided (duplex) printing only if the width is at least 210 mm (8.27 in.) and the length is at
least 279.4 mm (11 in.). The smallest supported Universal paper size is supported only in the multipurpose feeder.
Supported paper types and weights
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at a reduced speed.
Paper and specialty media guide 75
Paper type Standard
550‑sheet
tray
250‑ or
550‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex
mode
ADF Scanner
glass
Plain paper
Card stock X X X
Transparencies X
1
X
Recycled
Paper labels X
Bond X X X
Envelope
2
Rough envelope X X X
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored paper
Light paper
Heavy paper
Rough/Cotton X
Custom Type [x]
1
Transparencies are supported only in the 250‑sheet tray.
2
Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed on a table facedown.
Paper sizes, types, and weights supported by the optional finisher
Supported paper sizes
Paper size Dimensions Staple finisher
A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in.) X
A5 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in.) X
A6 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 in.) X
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.) X
Letter
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 in.) X
Paper and specialty media guide 76
Paper size Dimensions Staple finisher
Oficio (México)
216 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.) X
Universal 105 x 216 mm to 216 x 356 mm
(4.13 x 8.5 in. to 8.5 x 14 in.)
X
7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch) 98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in.) X
9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm (3.9 x 8.9 in.) X
10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 in.) X
DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 in.) X
C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.01 in.) X
B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in.) X
Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm (3.9 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm (6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X
Supported paper types and weights
Paper type Staple finisher
Plain paper
Card stock X
Transparencies X
Recycled
Paper labels
Bond
Envelope X
Rough envelope X
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored paper
Light paper
Heavy paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Paper and specialty media guide 77
Printing
Printing a document
Printing forms
Use Forms and Favorites to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly
printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see
“Setting up
Forms and Favorites” on page 23.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2 Apply the changes.
Printing from a computer
Note: For labels, card stock, and envelopes, set the paper size and type in the printer before sending the
print job.
1 From the document that you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2 If necessary, adjust the settings.
3 Send the print job.
Adjusting toner darkness
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness
2 Adjust the setting, and then touch Submit.
Printing 78
Printing from a mobile device
Notes:
• Make sure that the printer and mobile device share the same wireless network. For more information on
configuring the wireless settings of your mobile device, see the documentation that came with the
device.
• Mobile printing is available only in some printer models.
Printing from a mobile device using Mopria Print Service
Mopria® Print Service is a mobile printing solution for mobile devices running on Android version 4.4 or later. It
allows you to print directly to any Mopria‑certified printer.
Note: Before printing, make sure that the Mopria Print Service is enabled.
1 From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2 Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3 Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud Print
TM
is a mobile printing service that allows enabled applications on mobile devices to print
to any Google Cloud Print‑ready printer.
1 From the home screen of your mobile device, launch an enabled application.
2 Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3 Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using AirPrint
AirPrint is a mobile printing solution that allows you to print directly from Apple devices to an AirPrint‑certified
printer.
Notes:
• This application is supported only in some Apple devices.
• This application is supported only in some printer models.
1 From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2 Select an item to print, and then tap the share icon.
3 Tap Print, and then select a printer.
4 Print the document.
Printing 79
Printing from a mobile device using Lexmark Mobile Print
Lexmark Mobile Print allows you to send documents and images directly to a supported Lexmark printer.
1 Open the document, and then send or share the document to Lexmark Mobile Print.
Note: Some third‑party applications may not support the send or share feature. For more information, see
the documentation that came with the application.
2 Select a printer.
3 Print the document.
Printing from a
flash
drive
Printing from a
flash
drive
Notes:
• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer
control panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a
flash
drive into the USB port.
Notes:
• A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
• If you insert the
flash
drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred,
then the printer ignores the flash drive.
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the
printer display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print
documents from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector,
the memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the
memory device. Loss of data can occur.
Printing 80
2 From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3 Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.
4 Use or to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print.
Notes:
• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held
Jobs on the home screen to print
files
from the
flash
drive.
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
• High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not
supported.
• USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New
Technology File System (NTFS) or any other
file
system are not supported.
Printing 81
Recommended flash drives File type
• Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
• SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
• Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)
Documents:
• .pdf
• .xps
Images:
• .dcx
• .gif
• .jpeg or .jpg
• .bmp
• .pcx
• .ti or .tif
• .png
•
.fls
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and
PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer
control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 1–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you
to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically
deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
• Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
• You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the
printer control panel.
• All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
Printing 82
2 To uc h Submit.
Printing held jobs
1 From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2 Select the printer, and then do the following:
• For Windows users, click Properties or Preferences, and then click Print and Hold.
• For Macintosh users, select Print and Hold.
3 Select the print job type.
4 If necessary, assign a user name.
5 Send the print job.
6 From the printer home screen, touch Held Jobs.
7 Send the print job.
Modifying
confidential
print settings
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3 Modify the settings:
• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that
user are deleted.
• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4 Click Submit to save the modified settings.
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2 To uc h PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing 83
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press
on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
1 Depending on the operating system, do either of the following:
• Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
• From the System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2 Select the print job to cancel.
Printing 84
Copying
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy
paper are the same.
3 From the printer control panel, press .
Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 Adjust the paper guides.
Copying 85
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan
the next page.
3 Tou ch Finish the Job.
Copying photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >
3 From the Content Source menu, select the appropriate setting that best matches the original photo.
4 Tou ch > Copy It
Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan the next page.
5 Tou ch Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
Copying 86
3 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It
If there are no trays that contain transparencies, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder >
> select the size of the transparencies > > Transparency >
4 Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Copying on letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the letterhead > Copy It
5 If there are no trays that support letterhead, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > select the size of the letterhead > Letterhead
6 Load the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Customizing copy settings
Copying to a dierent size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select a new size for the copy >
> Copy It
Copying 87
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the paper type you want to use >
5 Tou ch Copy It.
Copying dierent paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with dierent paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and
the “Copy to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled
to
fit
a single paper size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > Auto Size Match >
> Copy It
The scanner identifies the dierent paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper
sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Copying 88
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > Letter >
> Copy It
The scanner
identifies
the
dierent
paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes
to
fit
on the paper size selected.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method
Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents
while the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you
have two-sided original documents and you want two‑sided copies.
4 Tou ch > Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Copy.
Copying 89
4 From the Scale area, touch or to decrease or increase the value by 1%.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original
document to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
5 Tou ch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.
• Tex t—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Tex t/Pho to—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
5 Tou ch .
6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7 To uc h > Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print
the copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Copying 90
Collated Not collated
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages >
> Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Set Collate to “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑
2,2,2,” then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see
“Collating copies” on page 90.
4 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs
• Between Pages
• O
5 Tou ch > Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto
a single sheet of paper.
Copying 91
Notes:
• Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
• Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select the output you want >
> Copy It
Note: If Paper Saver is set to
O,
then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.
Creating a custom copy job
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy
job. Each set may be scanned using dierent job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job
is enabled, the scanner scans the
first
set of original documents using the
specified
settings, and then it scans
the next set with the same or
dierent
settings.
The
definition
of a set depends on the scan source:
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes
empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
For example:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Custom Job > On >
> Copy It
Note: When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass, and
then touch Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed.
Note: Change the scan job settings, if necessary.
5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Copying 92
Placing information on copies
Placing a header or footer on pages
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer > select where you want to place the header or footer > select
the type of header or footer you want
4 Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected, and then touch Done.
5 Tou ch , and then press .
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom,
and Draft.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message > Done > Copy It
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
From the home screen, touch Cancel Job.
Canceling appears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.
Copying 93
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press
on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Understanding the copy options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.
• Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
• To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
• To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, touch Auto Size Sense.
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
• If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are dierent, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale
setting to accommodate the dierence.
• If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual
Feeder, and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a
matching paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to
load a paper in a tray or multipurpose feeder.
Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set
automatic scaling.
• When copying to a dierent paper size, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and
“Copy to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are
copying.
• To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch or on the printer control panel. To make a continuous
decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.
Copying 94
Sides (Duplex)
This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.
Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
• Tex t—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Tex t/Pho to—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
Select from the following content sources:
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Brochure—The original document is from a brochure.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut number.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before
you scan the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Copying 95
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is
within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Adjust ADF Skew—This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF
tray.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Copying 96
E-mailing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can
type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.
Setting up the printer to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
Configuring e‑mail settings
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
E-mailing 97
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the e‑mail recipient, and then type the e‑mail address. If you are entering multiple
addresses, then separate each address with a comma.
5 Click Add.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
2 To uc h Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
3 Tou ch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
4 Adjust the e‑mail settings.
Note: If you change the settings after the e‑mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not
saved.
5 Tou ch .
6 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
7 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
• The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when e‑mailing another document using the same settings.
E-mailing 98
E-mailing a document
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can
type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or
MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For more information, see
“Activating the home screen
applications” on page 23.
Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper
size are the same.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s)
4 Type the e‑mail address, or press # using the keypad, and then enter the shortcut number.
Notes:
• To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number
you want to add.
• You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5 Tou ch Done > Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch .
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number
that you want to add.
4 Tou ch Send It.
E-mailing 99
Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > > type the name of the recipient > Search
4 Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number
that you want to add, or search the address book.
5 Tou ch Done.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done
4 Tou ch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
5 Tou ch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done > Send as
E-mailing 100
3 Select the file type you want to send.
Note: If you select Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.
4 Tou ch > Send It.
Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next
Page / Finish the Job appears.
Understanding the e-mail options
Recipient(s)
This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.
Message
This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e‑mail. When Original Size is set to
Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-
mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces
the file size.
E-mailing 101
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages. This can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned o in the Settings menu of
the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an
equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate
file
for each page of your original document.
• XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
• RTF—Use this to create a file in editable format.
• TXT—Use this to create an ASCII text file with no formatting.
Note: To use the RTF or TXT option, purchase and install the AccuRead
TM
OCR solution.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
• Tex t—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Tex t/Pho to—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
Select from the following content sources:
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Brochure—The original document is from a brochure.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from
film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the
paper. This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex)
and Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This
specifies
if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
E-mailing 102
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before
you e‑mail the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever
is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Adjust ADF Skew—This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF
tray.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
E-mailing 103
Faxing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents
including two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies,
photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Setting up the printer to fax
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top
or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the
business, other entity, or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending
fax machine, business, other entity, or individual). For more information, see
“Regulatory notices for
telecommunication terminal equipment” on page 327.
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded
Web Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax
setup information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax
capabilities, then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.
1 When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following:
a Enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
b Enter the fax name, and then touch Submit.
2 When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Faxing 104
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name
field,
type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Choosing a fax connection
Setting up fax using a standard telephone line
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of
fire,
use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Faxing 105
Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
Notes:
• You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer O).
• If you want to receive faxes automatically, then set the printer to pick up on a specified number of rings.
Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine
Note: If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for
the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes
automatically.
Faxing 106
Connected to the same telephone wall jack
PHONE
LINE
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the answering machine to the telephone port of the printer.
Faxing 107
Connected to dierent wall jacks
P
H
O
N
E
LIN
E
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
Notes:
• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then set the printer to receive faxes automatically.
• Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering
machine picks up calls after four rings, then set the printer Rings to Answer setting to six.
Faxing 108
Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service
02
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Notes:
• This setup works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax, and if you subscribe to a
distinctive ring service.
• When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the
telephone to receive the fax.
• You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically, but turn
o
the voice mail service when you
are expecting a fax.
Setting up fax using digital subscriber line
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Faxing 109
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Digital subscriber line (DSL) splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone
and fax signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel.
To minimize interference between the two channels, ask for a DSL filter from your DSL provider.
1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
3 Connect the other end of the cable to the telephone port on the DSL filter.
Note: To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the telephone port of
the printer, and then connect the telephone.
Setting up fax using VoIP telephone service
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Faxing 110
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge extra
cost for the activation of the second telephone port.
3 Connect the telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Notes:
• To check if the telephone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the port, and
then listen for a dial tone.
• If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay extra cost, then use a phone
splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port, and then plug the
printer and telephone into the splitter.
Faxing 111
• To check the splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter, and then listen for a dial tone.
Setting up fax using cable modem connection
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of
fire,
use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Note: To check if the telephone port on the cable modem is active, connect an analog telephone, and then
listen for a dial tone.
Faxing 112
Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Setting up fax in countries or regions with dierent telephone wall jacks and plugs
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Faxing 113
The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ11. If the wall jack or equipment in your facility
is not compatible with this type of connection, then use a telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or
region may not come with your printer, and you may need to purchase it separately.
There may be an adapter plug installed in the telephone port of the printer. Do not remove the adapter plug
from the telephone port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system.
Part name Part number
Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519
Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ11 wall jack
LINE
EXT
Faxing 114
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3 If you want to connect another device with a non‑RJ11 connector to the same wall jack, then connect it
directly to the telephone adapter.
Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany
The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering
machines. The F port is for telephones. Connect the printer to any of the N ports.
P
H
O
N
E
LIN
E
NFN
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.
3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices
as shown.
Faxing 115
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service lets you have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line. Each telephone
number is assigned a dierent ring pattern.
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Analog Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Admin Controls
> Answer On.
2 Select the ring pattern.
3 Apply the changes.
Setting the outgoing fax name and number
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number
field,
enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4 Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.
Configuring
the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Faxing 116
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom
Time Zone Setup section.
4 Click Submit.
Sending a fax
You can use the printer to send a fax to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the e‑mail
address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut
application from the printer home screen. For more information, see
“Activating the home screen applications”
on page 23.
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut.
Note: To add recipients, touch Next number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut
number, or search the address book.
5 Tou ch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
For Windows users
1
From the document that you are trying to fax, open the Print dialog.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Fax > Enable fax, and then enter the recipient fax number or numbers.
4 If necessary, configure other fax settings.
5 Apply the changes, and then send the fax job.
Faxing 117
Notes:
• The fax option is available only with the PostScript® driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For more
information, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
• To use the fax option with the PostScript driver,
configure
and enable it in the
Configuration
tab.
For Macintosh users
1
With a document open, choose File > Print.
2 Select the printer.
3 Enter the recipient fax number, and then configure other fax settings, if necessary.
4 Send the fax job.
Sending a fax using a shortcut number
Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can
contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4 Tou ch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the address book
The address book lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers. For more information on
enabling the address book feature, contact your system support person.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax >
> type the name of the recipient > Search
Note: You can search only for one name at a time.
4 Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It.
Faxing 118
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for
transmission are listed in the fax queue.
4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch .
The time is increased or decreased in 30‑minute increments.
5 Tou ch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system
support person.
3 Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:
• To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
• Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4 Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Faxing 119
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
Note: To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
2 To uc h .
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Note: If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to select the resolution you want.
Note: Select a resolution from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).
5 Tou ch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It.
Faxing 120
Viewing a fax log
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Reports.
3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
• In the Banned Fax List
field,
enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of
specific
fax callers
you want to block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or
while Scan the Next Page and Finish the Job appear.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to
memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch
the job you want to cancel.
Faxing 121
3 Tou ch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen
appears.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released
manually or at a scheduled day or time.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• O
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5 Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4 From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
Faxing 122
5 In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6 Click Submit.
Understanding the fax options
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Select from the following content types:
• Tex t—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Tex t/Pho to—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
Select from the following content sources:
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Brochure—The original document is from a brochure.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size
and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select one of the following:
• Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
• Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
• Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
• Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.
Faxing 123
Delayed Send
This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page
(duplex). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex)
and Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This
specifies
if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror
Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you fax the
document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is
within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Adjust ADF Skew—This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF
tray.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Faxing 124
Scanning
You can use the printer to send a
file
to an FTP address. You can type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number,
or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the printer home
screen. For more information, see
“Activating the home screen applications” on page 23.
Using Scan to Network
Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations
specified
by your system support
person. After the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup
process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using
its Embedded Web Server. For more information, see
“Setting up Scan to Network” on page 25.
Scanning to an FTP address
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a
document to an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There
are two methods for creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer control
panel.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup
3 Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system
support person.
4 Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Scanning 125
Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address >
> type a name for the shortcut > Done
2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Notes:
• If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
• If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Done > Send It
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Tou ch > Send It.
Scanning an FTP using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Scanning 126
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP >
> type the name of the recipient > Search
4 Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To search for additional recipients, touch New Search, and then type the name of the next
recipient.
5 Tou ch > Send It.
Scanning to a computer or
flash
drive
You can use the printer to send a scanned
file.
You can also use Scan to Network, Multi Send, and MyShortcut
applications from the printer home screen. For more information, see
“Activating the home screen applications”
on page 23.
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to
be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to
the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile
to the printer.
Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Scan
Profile
> Create Scan
Profile
.
Scanning 127
3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.
5 Type a scan name, and then a user name.
Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6 Click Submit.
Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when
you are ready to scan your documents.
7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
c Do either of the following:
• Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
• From the home screen, navigate to:
Held Jobs > Profiles > select your shortcut on the list
Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.
8 View the file from the computer.
Note: The output
file
is saved in the location or launched in the program you
specified.
Setting up Scan to Computer
Notes:
• This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
• Make sure your computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
Note: If your printer is not in the list, then add your printer.
2 Open the printer properties, and then adjust the settings as necessary.
3 From the control panel, touch Scan to Computer > select the appropriate scan setting > Send It.
Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Scanning 128
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.
4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.
5 Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.
Using the ScanBack Utility
You can use the Lexmark ScanBack
TM
Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create scan‑to‑computer
profiles. The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
1 Set up your scan‑to‑computer
profile:
a Launch the ScanBack Utility.
b Select the printer.
If no printers are listed, then contact your system support person, or click Setup to manually search for
an IP address or host name.
c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and
what kind of output you want to create.
d Assign a file name of your scan profile, and then specify a location on your computer.
e Click Finish.
A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.
Note: You can select Create Shortcut to create a shortcut of the scan
profile
settings to your desktop.
2 Scan your original documents:
a Load all pages into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
b From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Held jobs > Profiles and Apps > select your scan profile
Note: Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.
Understanding the scan options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
File Name
This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.
Scanning 129
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a number.
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to
Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size
and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages. The PDF can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
• TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned o in the Settings menu, then
TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
• XPS—Use to create a single XPS
file
with multiple pages.
• RTF—Use to create a
file
in editable format.
• TXT—Use to create ASCII text file with no formatting.
Note: To use the RTF or TXT option, purchase and install the AccuRead OCR solution.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
• Tex t—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Tex t/Pho to—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
Select from the following content sources:
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
Scanning 130
• Brochure—The original document is from a brochure.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the
paper.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex)
and Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This
specifies
if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature
settings before you scan the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is
within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows
an error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Scanning 131
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports Security
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Weight
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
Universal Setup
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Stapler Test
Network Setup Page
1
Network [x] Setup Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E‑mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles
List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
Event Log Summary
Active NIC
Standard Network
2
Standard USB
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
SMTP Setup
Edit Security Settings
Miscellaneous Security
Settings
Confidential Print Menu
Erase Temporary Data Files
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
Settings Help Manage Shortcuts
Option Card Menu
3
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
E‑mail Settings
FTP Settings
Flash Drive Menu
OCR Settings
Print Settings
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
E‑mail Guide
Fax Guide
FTP Guide
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Fax Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Copy Shortcuts
Profile
Shortcuts
A list of installed DLEs
(Download Emulators)
appears.
1
Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Network Setup Page or Network [x] Setup Page.
2
Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
3
This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
Understanding the printer menus 132
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use To
Default Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for
Multipurpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays
have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked.
When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Paper Size/Type menu
Use To
Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS‑B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio
(Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays
have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. The
multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is empty,
the print job continues using the linked tray.
• The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and the multipurpose
feeder.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 133
Use To
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1.
Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting for all other trays.
• If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom
Type [x].
• Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
Multipurpose Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio
(Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for
Multipurpose Feeder Size to appear as a menu.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size.
Make sure to set the paper size value.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 134
Use To
Multipurpose Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure to “Cassette” for Multipurpose
Feeder Type to appear as a menu.
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio
(Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 135
Use To
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type being manually loaded.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” for Manual
Paper Type to appear as a menu.
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.
Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Configure MP menu
Use To
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper
source.
Understanding the printer menus 136
Substitute Size menu
Use To
Substitute Size
O
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not
available.
Notes:
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
• O indicates no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper
message appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Use To
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 137
Use To
Rough Envelope Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded.
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.
Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if the custom type is supported.
Paper Weight menu
Use To
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 138
Use To
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Weight
Light
Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is light.
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Understanding the printer menus 139
Use To
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
Paper Loading menu
Use To
Recycled Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type.
Bond Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type.
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type.
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type.
Colored Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type.
Light Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Light as the paper type.
Heavy Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type.
Notes:
• Duplex sets two‑sided printing as the default for all print jobs unless one‑sided printing is set from Printing
Preferences or Print dialog.
• If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one‑sided jobs.
• O is the factory default setting for all the menus.
Understanding the printer menus 140
Use To
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only if the custom type is
supported.
Notes:
• Duplex sets two‑sided printing as the default for all print jobs unless one‑sided printing is set from Printing
Preferences or Print dialog.
• If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one‑sided jobs.
• O is the factory default setting for all the menus.
Custom Types menu
Use To
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope
Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default
custom type name or a user‑defined custom name created from
the Embedded Web Server or from MarkVision
TM
Professional.
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope
Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder to print from that
source.
Custom Names menu
Use To
Custom Name [x] Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom
Type [x] in the printer menus.
Understanding the printer menus 141
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use To
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Width
Height
Orientation
2 scans per side
O
On
Specify a custom scan size name, size, and page orientation.
Notes:
• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 216 mm is the
international factory default setting for Width.
• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 356 mm is the
international factory default setting for Height.
• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• O is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.
Universal Setup menu
Use To
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identify the units of measure.
Notes:
• Inches is the U.S. factory default setting.
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Portrait Width
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the portrait width.
Notes:
• If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase
the width in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can
increase the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the portrait height.
Notes:
• If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can
increase the height in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either
direction.
Notes:
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than
the maximum width supported in the tray.
Understanding the printer menus 142
Reports menu
Use To
Menu Settings Page Print a report on the current printer menu settings. The report also contains
information about the status of the supplies and a list of hardware options
that are successfully installed.
Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics, such as supply information and
the number of printed pages.
Stapler Test Print a report that confirms whether the staple finisher is functioning
properly.
Note: This menu item appears only when a supported staple
finisher
is
installed.
Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network settings of the
printer.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers
connected to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network settings of the
printer.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers
connected to print servers, and when there is more than one network
option installed.
Shortcut List Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
• This menu is supported only in some printer models.
Fax Call Log Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,
and blocked calls.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
• This menu is supported only in some printer models.
Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
E‑mail Shortcuts Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.
Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print Fonts Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set
in the printer.
Understanding the printer menus 143
Use To
Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or
hard disk.
Notes:
• Job Buer Size must be set to 100%.
• Make sure that the memory card or hard disk is installed and working
correctly.
Asset Report Print a report containing asset information, including the printer serial
number and model name. The report contains text and UPC bar codes that
can be scanned into an asset database.
Event Log Summary Print a summary of logged events.
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use To
Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when an optional network card is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu.
Use To
Energy Ecient Ethernet
Enable
Disable
Reduce power consumption when the printer receives no data from the
Ethernet network.
Note: Enable is the factory default setting.
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine
incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu.
Understanding the printer menus 144
Use To
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine
incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu.
NPA Mode
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Network Buer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the network input buer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link
buers,
and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buers.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu
only appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Show and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a
wireless network.
Understanding the printer menus 145
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP
address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use To
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View the connection status of the wireless network adapter.
View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
View the network addresses.
Job Timeout
0, 10–225 seconds
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
Notes:
• “90 seconds” is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalid appears on the
display, and the value is not saved.
Banner Page
O
On
Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use To
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus 146
Use To
IP Address View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto
IP settings to
O.
It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to
O
on
systems that support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
On
O
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
On
O
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
O
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIP
Ye s
No
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Ye s
No
Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File
Transfer Protocol.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server
Ye s
No
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the
printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
Ye s
No
View or change the current DDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
Ye s
No
View or change the current mDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address View or change the backup DNS server addresses.
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
Ye s
No
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 147
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
• Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use To
Enable IPv6
On
O
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
On
O
Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic
IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Set the host name.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
O
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to an Ethernet network and printers with a wireless
network adapter attached.
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Wireless
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network connection and enable network
security.
Notes:
• Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
• Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network
when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings
of the access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point
with WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 148
Use To
Network Mode
BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specify the network mode.
Notes:
• Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.
• Ad hoc configures a wireless connection directly between the
printer and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Use To
Activate
Ye s
No
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
Set Zone
[list of zones available on the
network]
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 149
Standard USB menu
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer
language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS
SmartSwitch is set to O.
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL
SmartSwitch is set to
O.
NPA Mode
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
• The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the
printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
USB Buer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the USB input buer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns o job buering. Any jobs already buered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The USB buer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buers.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 150
Use To
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• On buers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• O filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
Parallel [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer
language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language
specified
in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is
set to O.
Understanding the printer menus 151
Use To
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to
O.
NPA Mode
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Parallel Buer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the parallel input buer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns
o
job
buering.
Any print jobs already
buered
on the
printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The parallel buer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or
O.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the USB, serial, and network buers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• On
buers
print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Advanced Status
On
O
Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• O disables parallel port negotiation.
Understanding the printer menus 152
Use To
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Specify the parallel port protocol.
Notes:
• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
• Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
On
O
Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
computer.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time
the computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
O
Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of
a strobe.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
•
O
filters
print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
Serial [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 153
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer
language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is
set to O.
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to
O,
the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language
specified
in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to
O.
NPA Mode
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
• When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in
NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.
• When set to O, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Serial Buer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the serial input buer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns
o
job
buering.
Any jobs already
buered
on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The serial buer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or
O.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 154
Use To
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting. The printer does not buer print jobs on
the printer hard disk.
• On buers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR
Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.
Notes:
• DTR is the factory default setting.
• DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
• XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
• XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Robust XON
On
O
Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.
Notes:
• 9600 is the factory default setting.
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in
the Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial
Option 1, Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
Data Bits
7
8
Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 155
Use To
Honor DSR
On
O
Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port
uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by
electrical noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray
characters to print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from
printing.
SMTP Setup menu
Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying
to send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by
the printer.
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to
the SMTP server.
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server
determines if SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 156
Use To
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the
SMTP server.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail
and User‑Initiated E‑mail.
• “Device Userid” and “Device password” are used to log in to
the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is
selected.
User‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID and Password
Use Session E‑mail address and
Password
Prompt user
Device Userid
Device password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Security menu
Edit Security Setups menu
Note: This menu appears only in select touch‑screen printer models.
Use To
Edit Backup Password
Use Backup Password
• O
• On
Password
Create a backup password.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting for “Use Backup Password.”
• This menu appears only if a backup password exists.
Edit Building Blocks
Internal Accounts
NTLM
Simple Kerberos Setup
Kerberos Setup
Active Directory
LDAP
LDAP+GSSAPI
Password
PIN
Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos
Setup, Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.
Edit Security Templates
[list of available templates]
Add or edit a security template.
Understanding the printer menus 157
Use To
Edit Access Controls
Administrative Menus
Function Access
Management
Solutions
Cancel jobs at the Device
Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points.
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use To
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer
control panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users
are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts. “3 attempts” is the
factory default setting.
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1
to 60 minutes. “5 minutes” is the factory default setting.
• “Lockout time”
specifies
how long users are locked out after exceeding
the login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. “5 minutes” is
the factory default setting. 1 indicates that the printer does not impose a
lockout time.
• Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
home screen before automatically logging o the user. Settings range
from 1 to 900 seconds. “30 seconds” is the factory default setting.
• Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains
idle before automatically logging othe user. Settings range from 1 to 120
minutes. “10 minutes” is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
No
Eect
Access controls=“No Security”
Reset factory security defaults
Adjust the security settings.
Notes:
• No Eect means the reset has no eect on the printer security
configuration.
• Access controls=’No Security’ retains all the security information that the
user has defined. No Security is the factory default setting.
• “Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the
user has defined, and restores the factory default settings in the
Miscellaneous Security menu.
Understanding the printer menus 158
Use To
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never
Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Notes:
• “Demand” is the factory default setting. This means a server certificate is
requested. If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided,
then the session is terminated immediately.
• “Try ” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then
the session is terminated immediately.
• “Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is
provided, then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is
provided, then it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally.
• “Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16
Limit the digit length of the personal identification number (PIN).
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
Confidential Print menu
Use To
Max Invalid PIN
O
2–10
Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
• When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are
deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs.
Notes:
• If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print
jobs reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk, then the expiration time
for those print jobs does not change to the new default value.
• If the printer is turned o, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory
are deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 159
Use To
Verify Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Erase Temporary Data Files menu
Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by
the file system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros,
and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use To
Wiping Mode
Auto
Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit
the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Notes:
• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
• Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data files
without having to turn o the printer for an extended amount of time.
• Highly
confidential
information should be erased using only the Multiple
pass method.
Security Audit Log menu
Use To
Export Log Enable an authorized user to export the security log.
Notes:
• To export the log from the printer control panel, attach a flash drive to the
printer.
• To export the log from the Embedded Web Server, download the log to a
computer.
Understanding the printer menus 160
Use To
Delete Log
Ye s
No
Specify whether audit logs are deleted.
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Ye s
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Ye s
Remote Syslog Server
[256 character string]
Remote Syslog Port
1–65535
Remote Syslog Method
Normal UDP
Stunnel
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Log full behavior
Wrap over oldest entries
E‑mail log then delete all
entries
Specify how audit logs are configured.
Notes:
• Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log
and remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
• Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No
is the factory default setting.
• Remote Syslog Server determines the value used to send logs to the
remote syslog server.
• Remote Syslog Port
identifies
the port over which the printer transmits
logged events to a remote server.
• Remote Syslog Method identifies the protocol used by the printer to
transmit logged events to a remote server. Normal UDP is the factory
default setting.
• Remote Syslog Facility determines the Facility value that the printer uses
when sending events to the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default
setting.
• “Log full behavior” determines how the printer resolves if the log entirely
fills its allotted memory. “Wrap over oldest entries” is the factory default
setting.
Understanding the printer menus 161
Use To
Configure Log (continued)
Admin’s e-mail address
[256 character string]
Digitally sign exports
O
On
Severity of events to log
0–7
Remote Syslog non-logged events
No
Ye s
E-mail log cleared alert
No
Ye s
E-mail log wrapped alert
No
Ye s
E-mail % full alert
No
Ye s
% full alert level
1–99
E-mail log exported alert
No
Ye s
E-mail log settings changed alert
No
Ye s
Log line endings
LF (\n)
CR (\r)
CRLF (\r\n)
Specify how audit logs are configured.
Notes:
• “Admin’s e‑mail address” determines if administrators are
automatically
notified
of certain log events. This setting can have one
or more e‑mail addresses (separated by commas).
• “Digitally sign exports” determines if the printer automatically signs
each exported security log. O is the factory default setting.
• “Severity of events to log” records the severity value of each event. 4
is the factory default setting.
• “Remote Syslog non-logged events” determines if the printer sends
events to the remote server that have a severity level greater than
the value of the “Severity of events to log” setting. No is the factory
default setting.
• “E-mail log cleared alert” determines if the printer sends an e‑mail to
the administrator every time a log is deleted through the printer
control panel or EWS. No is the factory default setting.
• “E-mail log wrapped alert” determines if the printer sends the
administrator an e‑mail when log entries are wrapping. No is the
factory default setting.
• “E-mail % full alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator
an e‑mail when the log fills a certain amount of its allotted space. No
is the factory default setting.
• “% full alert level” determines if the space occupied by log equals or
exceeds the value of the full alert level. 90 is the factory default
setting.
• “E-mail log exported alert” determines if the printer sends the
administrator an e‑mail when there is a log exported. No is the factory
default setting.
• “E-mail log settings changed alert” determines if the printer sends the
administrator an e‑mail when the value of the Enable Audit Log
setting is toggled. No is the factory default setting.
• “Log line endings” specifies how line endings will be handled in the
log file, depending on the operating system in which the file will be
parsed or viewed. “LF (\n)” is the factory default setting.
Set Date/Time menu
Use To
Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Manually Set Date and Time Enter the date and time.
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
Time Zone Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 162
Use To
Automatically Observe DST
On
O
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end
times associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight
Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting.
Custom Time Zone Setup
DST Start Week
DST Start Day
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Oset
Enable the user to set up the time zone.
Enable NTP
On
O
Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
NTP Server View the NTP server address.
Enable Authentication
On
O
Change the authentication setting to On or O.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 163
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use To
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Set the language of the text that appears on the display.
Note: Not all languages are available for all models. You may
need to install special hardware for some languages.
Show Supply Estimates
Show estimates
Do not show estimates
View the supply estimates on the control panel, Embedded
Web Server, menu settings, and device statistics reports.
Note: Show estimates is the factory default setting.
Eco-Mode
O
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• Setting Eco‑Mode to Energy or Paper may aect printer
performance, but not print quality.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Enable an ADF beep sound when loading paper.
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Quiet Mode
O
On
Reduce printer noise.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 164
Use To
Run Initial setup
Ye s
No
Run the setup wizard.
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]
Specify a language and custom key information for the
keyboard on the display.
Paper Sizes
US
Metric
Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.
Notes:
• US is the factory default setting.
• The country or region selected in the initial setup wizard
determines the initial paper size setting.
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]
Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 165
Use To
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Specify the display information on the upper corners of the
home screen.
Select from the following options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:
• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Displayed Information (continued)
Custom Text [x]
Customize the text to display in the upper corners of the home
screen.
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner
Specify the display information for Black Toner.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to
display.
Understanding the printer menus 166
Use To
Displayed Information (continued)
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Customize the displayed information for certain menus.
Select from the following options:
Display
Ye s
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• No is the factory default setting for Display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to
display.
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Apps
Bookmarks
Jobs by User
Forms and Favorites
Card Copy
Scan to Network
MyShortcut
Change the icons that appear on the home screen.
Select from the following options:
Display
Do not display
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Format the printer date.
Note: MM‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting. DD-
MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Format the printer time.
Note: 12 hour A.M./P.M. is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 167
Use To
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specify the brightness of the display.
Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
One Page Copy
O
On
Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
O
Volume
1–10
Set the button volume and feedback.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
• 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Show Bookmarks
Ye s
No
Specify whether to display bookmarks from the Held Jobs
area.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Background Removal
On
O
Specify whether to allow image background removal.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
O
Scan multiple jobs to one file.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job Level
Page Level
Specify how to reload a scanned job when a paper jam occurs
in the ADF.
Note: Job Level is the factory default setting.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specify the time between Embedded Web Server refreshes.
Note: 120 seconds is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Location Specify the printer location.
Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Set an alarm when the printer requires user intervention.
Select from the following options:
O
Single
Continuous
Notes:
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control.
• O is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm.
Understanding the printer menus 168
Use To
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240
Set the idle time before the printer enters a lower power state.
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–120
Set the idle time before the printer begins operating in Sleep
mode.
Notes:
• 20 minutes is the factory default setting.
• Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to
O.
Timeouts
Print with Display O
Allow printing with display o
Display on when printing
Print a job with the display turned o.
Note: Display on when printing is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
20 minutes
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
6 hours
1 day
2 days
3 days
1 week
2 weeks
1 month
Set the time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate
Set the printer to Hibernate mode even if there is an active
Ethernet connection.
Note: Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Set the idle time before the display automatically returns to
Ready state.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Set the printer to end a print job after it has been idle for the
specified amount of time.
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL
emulation.
Understanding the printer menus 169
Use To
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Set the time the printer waits for more data before canceling a
print job.
Notes:
• 40 seconds is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation.
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Set the time the printer waits for user intervention before it
holds jobs that require unavailable resources.
Notes:
• 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a hard disk is
installed.
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Set the printer to restart when an error occurs.
Note: Reboot always is the factory default setting.
Error Recovery
Max Auto Reboots
1–20
Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can
perform.
Note: 2 is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain
oine situations when these are not resolved within the
specified time period.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
O
Auto
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Jam Assist
On
O
Set the printer to check for jammed paper automatically.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
O
On
Set the printer to print the correct output for a page.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Accessibility Settings
Prolong Screen Timeout
On
O
Remain in the same location and reset the Screen Timeout
timer instead of returning to the home screen.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 170
Use To
Accessibility Settings
Speech Rate
Very Slow
Slow
Normal
Fast
Faster
Very Fast
Rapid
Very Rapid
Fastest
Adjust the Voice Guidance speaking rate.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Accessibility Settings
Headphone Volume
1–10
Set the headphones volume.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a long
press of the Sleep button.
Note: Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Restore the printer factory default settings.
Notes:
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting.
• All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted.
Downloads stored in the
flash
memory or on a hard disk
are not aected.
Export Configuration File
Export
Export configuration files to a flash drive.
Copy Settings menu
Use To
Content Type
Te xt
Graphics
Te xt /P hot o
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 171
Use To
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specify whether an original document is two‑sided or one‑sided, and then
specify whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.
Note: 1 sided to 1 sided is the factory default setting. This setting is selected
when using a one‑sided original document for a one‑sided copy job.
Paper Saver
O
2‑up Portrait
4‑up Portrait
2‑up Landscape
4‑up Landscape
Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Print Page Borders
On
O
Specify whether a border is printed.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
Staple
O
On
Enable the staple finisher.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 172
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Auto Size Match
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transparency Separators
On
O
Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Number of Copies
1–9999
Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 173
Use To
Header/Footer
[Location]
O
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text
Specify the header or footer information and its location on the page.
For the location, select from the following options:
• Top left
• Top middle
• Top right
• Bottom left
• Bottom middle
• Bottom right
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting for the location.
• All pages is the factory default setting for Print on.
Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
O
Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Custom Overlay Specify the custom overlay text.
Allow priority copies
On
O
Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
O
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Auto Center
O
On
Automatically align the content at the center of the page.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 174
Use To
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast used for the copy job.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
O
On
Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Sample Copy
O
On
Create a sample copy of the original document.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.
Understanding the printer menus 175
General Fax Settings
Use To
Restore Factory Defaults Restore the factory defaults of all fax settings.
Optimize Fax Compatibility Optimize fax compatibility with other fax machines.
Fax Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Fax Number Specify the number assigned to the fax.
Fax ID
Fax Name
Fax Number
Specify how the fax is identified.
Note: Fax Number is the factory default setting.
Enable Manual Fax
On
O
Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone
handset.
Notes:
•
O
is the factory default setting.
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
• Tou ch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to this setting.
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly send
All send
Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving
fax jobs.
Note: Equal is the factory default setting.
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Specify whether canceling of fax jobs is allowed.
Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Caller ID
O
Primary
Alternate
Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Fax number masking
O
From left
From right
Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to Mask
setting.
Digits to Mask
0–58
Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 176
Use To
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
O
by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
O
Include from Field
On
O
From
Include Message Field
On
O
Message
Include Logo
On
O
Include Footer [x]
On
O
Footer [x]
Configure the fax cover page.
Notes:
• O by default is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page.
• O is the factory default setting for all other menu items.
Fax Send Settings
Use To
Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality,
but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 177
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Oficio
(Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A3
A4
A5
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two-
sided scanning.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Te xt
Graphics
Te xt /P hot o
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Understanding the printer menus 178
Use To
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]
Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified
number.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial frequency
1–200
Specify the number of minutes between redials.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Behind a PABX
Ye s
No
Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Enable ECM
Ye s
No
Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable Fax Scans
On
O
Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Driver to fax
Ye s
No
Allow the print driver to send fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Dial Mode
To ne
Pulse
Specify a dialing sound.
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
O
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 179
Use To
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Ye l l ow - B l ue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting
for each color threshold.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
O
On
Correct the slight skew in the scanned image.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is supported only in some printer models.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge before faxing.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 180
Use To
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperat ur e
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax Scans
O by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Enable color faxing.
Note:
O
by default is the factory default setting.
Auto Convert Color Faxes to
Mono Faxes
On
O
Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Receive Settings
Use To
Enable Fax Receive
On
O
Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Caller ID
On
O
Display the number sending the incoming fax job.
Note: On is the default factory setting.
Fax Job Waiting
None
To ne r
Toner and Supplies
Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
resources.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Rings to Answer
1–25
Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto Answer
Ye s
No
Allow the printer to answer an incoming fax job.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Manual Answer Code
0–9
Enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax.
Notes:
• 9 is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone.
Auto Reduction
On
O
Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the
designated fax source.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 181
Use To
Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
On
Enable two‑sided printing for incoming fax jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
O
Before Job
After Job
Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify a bin for received faxes.
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Fax Footer
On
O
Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received
fax.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward
Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF
Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded.
Notes:
• Fax is the factory default setting.
• This menu is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Forward to Shortcut Enter the shortcut number that matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP,
LDSS, or eSF).
Block No Name Fax
O
On
Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax
ID specified.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Banned Fax List Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Understanding the printer menus 182
Use To
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
O
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enable the printer to hold received faxes from printing until they are released.
Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Staple
O
1 staple
2 staples
4 staples
Specify whether prints are stapled.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a staple
finisher
is installed.
Enable Color Fax Receive
On
O
Enable the printer to receive fax in color and print it in grayscale.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Log Settings
Use To
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Enable printing of a received error log.
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Auto Print Logs
On
O
Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or
fax name returned.
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enable Job Log
On
O
Enable access to the Fax Job log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Call Log
On
O
Enable access to the Fax Call log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 183
Use To
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin for the printed fax logs.
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Speaker Settings
Use To
Speaker Mode
Always
O
On until Connected
Always On
Specify the mode of the speaker.
Note: On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until
the fax connection is made.
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Set the speaker volume to high or low.
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Ringer Volume
O
On
Enable or disable the ringer volume.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Answer On
Use To
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
Use To
To F ormat Enter specific fax information.
Reply Address
Subject
Message
SMTP Setup Specify SMTP setup information.
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server port information.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Understanding the printer menus 184
Use To
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
TIFF (.tif)
Specify the image format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Te xt
Graphics
Te xt /P hot o
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the content was originally produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Fax Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 185
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
O
Provide a choice between single‑page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all
the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the
scan job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Analog Receive
O
On
Enable receiving of analog faxes.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Settings menu
Use To
E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
File Name
Specify e‑mail server information.
E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
O by default
Always On
Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.
Note: Never appears is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 186
Use To
E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB
Specify the maximum e-mail size.
Note: E-mails above the
specified
size are not sent.
E‑mail Server Setup
Size Error Message
Send a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit.
E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limit e‑mail
destinations only to that domain name.
Note: You can only specify one domain.
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
File Name
Web Link
Define the e‑mail server Web link settings.
Note: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Notes:
• PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
• To use the RTF (.rtf) or TXT (.txt) option, purchase and install the
AccuRead OCR solution.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
O
On
Searchable PDF
O
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression. This menu
item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
• O is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF.
Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
• To use the Searchable PDF option, purchase and install the AccuRead
OCR solution.
Content Type
Te xt
Graphics
Te xt /P hot o
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 187
Use To
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
O
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 188
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for
two‑sided scanning.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the
image.
Notes:
• Best for content is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the
file
size and quality of the image.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Pho to Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of
the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Specify how the images are sent.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page Ti
On
O
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of
the job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG
Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enable printing of a transmission log after each e-mail job.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images
when Color is set to O.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 189
Use To
Custom Job scanning
On
O
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to O, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e-
mail destination screen.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan‑Red
Magenta-Green
Ye l l o w - B l u e
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 190
Use To
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
O
On
Correct the slight skew in the scanned image.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only in some printer models.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperat ur e
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Use cc:/bcc:
O
On
Enable the use of the cc and bcc fields.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
FTP Settings menu
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Notes:
• PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
• To use the RTF (.rtf) or TXT (.txt) option, purchase and install the
AccuRead OCR solution.
Understanding the printer menus 191
Use To
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
O
On
Searchable PDF
O
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression. This setting
appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
• O is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF.
Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
• To use the Searchable PDF option, purchase and install the AccuRead
OCR solution.
Content Type
Te xt
Graphics
Te xt /P hot o
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
O
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 192
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for
two‑sided scanning.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of
the image.
Notes:
• Best for content is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Pho to Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
O
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing
all the pages, or multiple TIFF
files
are created with one
file
for each page of
the job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 193
Use To
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG
Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether to print the transmission log.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
FTP bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Type a base file name.
Custom Job Scanning
On
O
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan‑Red
Magenta‑Green
Ye l l o w ‑Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Understanding the printer menus 194
Use To
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
O
On
Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is supported only in some printer models.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of the scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperat ur e
‑4 to 4
Enable the user to specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer
output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the
default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 195
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
O
On
Searchable PDF
O
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression. This menu
item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
• O is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF.
Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
Content Type
Te xt
Graphics
Te xt /P hot o
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
O
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 196
Use To
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long Edge
Short Edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two-
sided scanning.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Notes:
• Best for content is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 197
Use To
Text/Pho to Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
O
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Scan Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Type a base file name.
Custom Job Scanning
On
O
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan‑Red
Magenta-Green
Ye l l o w - B l u e
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the scanned image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 198
Use To
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
O
On
Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperat ur e
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Copies
1–999
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
Staple
O
On
Specify whether prints are stapled.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 199
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define binding for two‑sided pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting. It assumes binding along the long edge of
the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver
O
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specify that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that print per side.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border on each page image.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate
is set to (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If Collate is set to (1,1,1) (2,2,2), then a blank page is inserted
between each set of printed pages.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a
document.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 200
OCR Settings menu
Note: This menu appears only if you have purchased and installed the AccuRead OCR solution.
Use To
Auto Rotate
On
O
Automatically rotate scanned documents for proper orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Despeckle
O
On
Remove specks from a scanned image.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Inverse Detection
On
O
Recognize and make the white text on a black background editable.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Contrast Enhance
O
On
Automatically adjust the contrast to improve OCR quality.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Recognized Languages
English
French
German
Spanish
Italian
Portugues
Danish
Dutch
Norwegian
Swedish
Finnish
Hungarian
Polish
Set the language or languages that the OCR can recognize.
For each language, select from the following options:
O
On
Note: The language is enabled by default. If it is set to a value that is not in
the list of recognized languages, English is enabled by default.
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use To
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
Set the printer language.
Notes:
• PCL Emulation is the factory default setting.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not
prevent a software program from sending print jobs that
use another printer language.
Understanding the printer menus 201
Use To
Job Waiting
On
O
Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings.
Print jobs removed from the print queue are stored in a
separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When the
missing information or options are obtained, the stored jobs
print.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting appears only when a formatted,
working printer hard disk is installed. This requirement
ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer
loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Whole Page
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the
Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the
boundary.
• Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area
defined
by the Normal setting, but the
printer will clip the image at the Normal setting
boundary. This aects only pages printed using a PCL 5e
interpreter. This has no eect on pages printed using the
PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:
• RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in
the RAM is temporary.
• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard
disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads
remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even
when the printer is turned
o.
• This menu setting appears only when a formatted,
working flash drive or printer hard disk is installed.
Resource Save
On
O
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such
as fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer
receives a job that requires more memory than is available.
Notes:
•
O
is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to
retain the downloads only until memory is needed.
Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.
• On retains the downloads during language changes and
printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then
Memory Full [38] appears, and downloads are not
deleted.
Understanding the printer menus 202
Use To
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are
printed when Print All is selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs
always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control
panel.
Finishing menu
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether two‑sided printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
• 1 sided is the factory default setting.
• You can set two‑sided printing from the printer software.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define the way two‑sided pages are bound and printed.
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting. This setting assumes binding
along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for
landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge
for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If Collate is set to (1,1,1) (2,2,2), then a blank
page is inserted between each set of printed pages.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job.
This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting
blank pages in a document.
Understanding the printer menus 203
Use To
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Paper Saver
O
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Print multiple‑page images on one side of a paper.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that print per side.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images when using Paper Saver.
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they
are in portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between
portrait and landscape.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Staple Job
O
On
Specify whether printed output is stapled.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a supported staple
finisher
is
installed.
Run Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.
Note: This menu item appears only when a supported staple
finisher
is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus 204
Quality menu
Use To
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.
Pixel Boost
O
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images
horizontally or vertically, or to enhance fonts.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness
1–10
Lighten or darken the printed output.
Notes:
• 8 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
O
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps,
electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer
IP address in the Web browser address field.
Gray Correction
Auto
O
Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Brightness
‑6 to 6
Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve
toner by lightening the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5
Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use To
Job Accounting Log
O
On
Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Understanding the printer menus 205
Use To
Accounting Log Frequency
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold
expires.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Log Near Full Level
O
1–99
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Log
Action at Near Full.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Log Action at Near Full
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting.
• The value
defined
in Log Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Log Action at Full
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the
maximum limit (100MB).
Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name
defined
in the TCP/IP menu is used as the
default log file prefix.
Understanding the printer menus 206
Utilities menu
Use To
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
• Selecting a setting aects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are
not
aected.
• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from
the printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Ye s
No
Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn
o
the printer while the
flash
memory is being formatted.
Notes:
• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory
card in the printer.
• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
• This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buered
jobs, and parked jobs.
Notes:
• Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the
display to return to the originating screen after the deletion.
• Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu
for touch‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen
printer models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating
screen after the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn o or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
O
On
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The
estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 207
XPS menu
Use To
Print Error Pages
O
On
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Use To
Scale to Fit
Ye s
No
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Use To
Print PS Error
On
O
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup Mode
On
O
Disable the SysStart file.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only when a formatted
flash
memory
option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.
• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
• Job Buer Size must not be set to 100%.
Understanding the printer menus 208
PCL Emul menu
Use To
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specify the set of fonts used in the Font Name menu.
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set
of fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option. Make
sure the flash option is properly formatted and is not read/write‑, or
password‑protected.
• Download shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10
Identify a specific font and where it is stored.
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Notes:
• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the
international factory default setting.
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters,
punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the dierent
languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific
text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 of an inch. This can be increased or
decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100.00
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
• 10 is the factory default setting.
• Pitch refers to the number of
fixed
‑space characters per inch (cpi).
This can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
• For non‑scalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the
display but cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on a page.
Notes:
• Portrait is the factory default setting. It prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the
page.
Understanding the printer menus 209
Use To
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default
setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on
the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the
paper size and orientation before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
• 198 mm is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing
of eighty 10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
O
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR)
after a line feed (LF) control command.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
O
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
O
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
O
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
O
None
0–199
Assign Manual Envelope
O
None
0–199
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
dierent source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• None ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This selection
appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter.
• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Understanding the printer menus 210
Use To
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T2 Default = 4
T3 Default = 5
T4 Default = 20
T5 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder.
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Ye s
No
Return all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default
settings.
HTML menu
Use To
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Tay
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do
not specify a font.
Understanding the printer menus 211
Use To
Font Size
1–255 pt
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use To
Auto Fit
On
O
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation
settings for some images.
Invert
On
O
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Notes:
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Understanding the printer menus 212
Use To
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and configuring the settings
E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending e‑mails and configuring the settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes and configuring the settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents and configuring the settings
Print Defects Guide Provides a template for determining the cause of repeating print quality
defects, and lists settings that can be used to adjust print quality
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies
Understanding the printer menus 213
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their
impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce
materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This
chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can
significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such
as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For more information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see
“Using
Eco‑Mode” on page 214.
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled oce paper produced
specifically for use in laser/LED printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your
printer, see
“Using recycled paper and other oce papers” on page 73.
Conserving supplies
• Print on both sides of the paper.
Note: Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
• Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
• Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before printing it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Saving money and the environment 214
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use To
O Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. O supports the
performance specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
• Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before
the
first
page is printed.
• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper
• Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
• Turn o print log features.
3 Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting
Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
• Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a
document is ready to print. There will be a short
delay before the first page is printed.
O Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications
of the printer.
3 Click Submit.
Saving money and the environment 215
Adjusting Sleep mode
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3 Apply the changes.
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power operating mode.
Notes:
• Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
• Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long
press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2 From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” menu, select Hibernate, and then touch
Submit.
Setting Hibernate Timeout
Hibernate Timeout lets you set the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it goes
into a reduced power state.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3 From the Hibernate Timeout menu, select the number of hours, days, weeks, or months you want for the
printer to wait before it goes into a reduced power state.
4 Click Submit.
Saving money and the environment 216
Using the printer control panel
1
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Hibernate Timeout
2 Select the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it enters Hibernate mode.
3 Tou ch .
Using Schedule Power Modes
Schedule Power Modes lets you schedule when the printer goes into a reduced power state or into Ready
state.
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Schedule Power Modes.
3 From the Action menu, select the power mode.
4 From the Time menu, select the time.
5 From the Day(s) menu, select the day or days.
6 Click Add.
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading the display, adjust its brightness settings.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.
Saving money and the environment 217
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more
information, see:
• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through
your local recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are
transported in the most ecient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to
dispose of. These
eciencies
result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource
savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist
in your area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle
the box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program allows you to return used cartridges for free to Lexmark for reuse
or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or
demanufactured for recycling. The boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, do the following:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Select the product that you want to recycle.
Saving money and the environment 218
Securing the printer
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Types of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard Random Access Memory
(RAM) to temporarily buer user data during simple print
and copy jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used
to store the operating system, device settings, network
information, scanner and bookmark settings, and
embedded solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality.
This lets the device retain buered user data from
complex scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form
data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
• The printer is being decommissioned.
• The printer hard disk is being replaced.
• The printer is being moved to a dierent department or location.
• The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
• The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
• The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your
premises.
• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic
field
that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely
erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the
buered
data, simply turn
o
the printer.
Securing the printer 219
Erasing non‑volatile memory
• Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase
information and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
• Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3 Tou ch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will restart several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords from the
printer memory.
4 Tou ch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Notes:
• Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
•
Configuring
Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual
confidential
material left by print jobs by securely overwriting
files
that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.
3 Tou ch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by
a
verification
pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely
erasing data from a hard disk. Highly
confidential
information should be wiped using this method.
4 Tou ch Ye s to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
Securing the printer 220
• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
5 Tou ch Back > Exit
Config
Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard
disk is installed.
3 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
• Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3 Tou ch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4 Tou ch Ye s to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• Do not turn
o
the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
Securing the printer 221
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the
printer will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5 Tou ch Back > Exit
Config
Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, go to the
Lexmark security Web page or see the Embedded Web Server—Security: Administrator’s Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Securing the printer 222
Maintaining the printer
Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and
supplies, may cause damage to your printer.
Cleaning printer parts
Cleaning the printer
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
Notes:
• Perform this task after every few months.
• Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty.
1 Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Wipe the outside of the printer with a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth.
Notes:
• Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.
• Make sure that all areas of the printer are dry after cleaning.
5 Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
Maintaining the printer 223
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.
3 Clean all the areas shown, and then let them dry.
1 White underside of the scanner cover
2 Scanner glass
3 ADF glass
4 White underside of the ADF cover
4 Close the scanner cover.
Maintaining the printer 224
Checking the status of parts and supplies
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Device Status > More Details.
Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy
may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings,
and other printer settings.
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption
is dierent from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing
or replacing supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, initial
estimates assume future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization*
test methods and page content.
* Average continuous black declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
Ordering supplies
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized
supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where
you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party
supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use
of third-party supplies or parts can aect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies
or parts is not covered by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and
parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage
beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Maintaining the printer 225
Ordering toner cartridges
Notes:
• The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19752 standard.
• Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively aect actual yield.
MX610 and MX611 Return program cartridges
Item United
States and
Canada
European
Economic
Area (EEA+)
Rest of Europe,
Middle East,
and Africa
(RoEMEA)
Latin America
Distribution
(LAD)
Rest of Asia
Pacific (RoAP)
Australia and
New Zealand
(ANZ)
Tone r
cartridge
60F1000 60F2000 60F5000 60F4000 60F3000 60F3000
High yield
toner
cartridge
60F1H00 60F2H00 60F5H00 60F4H00 60F3H00 60F3H00
Extra high
yield toner
cartridge
60F1X00 60F2X00 60F5X00 60F4X00 60F3X00 60F3X00
For more information on countries located in each region, go to
www.lexmark.com/regions.
MX610 and MX611 Regular cartridges
Item Worldwide
Extra high yield toner cartridge 60F0XA0
For more information on countries located in each region, go to
www.lexmark.com/regions.
MX617 Return program cartridges
Item United
States and
Canada
European
Economic
Area (EEA+)
Rest of Europe,
Middle East,
and Africa
(RoEMEA)
Latin America
Distribution
(LAD)
Rest of Asia
Pacific
(RoAP)
Australia and
New Zealand
(ANZ)
Tone r
cartridge
51B1000 51B2000 51B5000 51B4000 51B3000 51B6000
High yield
toner cartridge
51B1H00 51B2H00 51B5H00 51B4H00 51B3H00 51B6H00
Extra high
yield toner
cartridge
51B1X00 51B2X00 51B5X00 51B4X00 51B3X00 51B6X00
For more information on countries located in each region, go to
www.lexmark.com/regions.
Maintaining the printer 226
MX617 Regular cartridges
Item Worldwide
Extra high yield toner cartridge 51B0XA0
For more information on countries located in each region, go to
www.lexmark.com/regions.
Ordering an imaging unit
Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to
exhaustion of toner from toner cartridge.
For more information on replacing the imaging unit, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Part name Lexmark Return Program Regular
Imaging unit 500Z 500ZA
Ordering staple cartridges
Part name Part number
Staple cartridges 35S8500
Ordering a maintenance kit
Notes:
• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
• The separator roller, fuser, pick rollers, transfer roller, and redrive assembly are all included in the
maintenance kit and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary.
• Contact your service representative to replace the maintenance kit.
Maintenance kit Part number
100‑V maintenance kit
*
40X9147
110‑V maintenance kit 40X9137
220‑V maintenance kit 40X9138
*
This is available only in Japan.
Ordering an ADF separator roller
Order an ADF separator roller when the ADF fails to pick paper or picks more than one sheet of paper at a time.
For information on replacing the ADF separator roller, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
Part name Part number
Separator roller 40X9108
Maintaining the printer 227
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing
until you are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
• Direct sunlight
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
• High humidity above 80%
• Salty air
• Corrosive gases
• Heavy dust
Replacing supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.
Maintaining the printer 228
2 Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.
3 Unpack the toner cartridge, and then remove all packing materials.
4 Shake the new cartridge to redistribute the toner.
5 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the
side rails inside the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
6 Close the front door.
Maintaining the printer 229
Replacing the imaging unit
1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.
2 Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.
3 Lift the green handle, and then pull the imaging unit out of the printer.
Maintaining the printer 230
4 Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.
5 Remove all packing materials from the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may aect the print
quality of future print jobs.
6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the
arrows on the side rails inside the printer.
Maintaining the printer 231
7 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the
side rails inside the printer.
8 Close the front door.
Replacing the staple cartridge
1 Open the stapler door.
Maintaining the printer 232
2 Pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.
3 Hold both sides of the empty staple case with your
fingers,
pull, and then lift the empty staple case from the
cartridge.
1
2
3
4 Remove the spare staple case from its holder.
5 Insert the spare staple case into the staple cartridge.
1
2
Maintaining the printer 233
6 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place.
7 Replace the spare staple case for future use.
8 Close the stapler door.
Moving the printer
Moving the printer to another location
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
• Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.
• Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
• If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when passing over
thresholds and breaks in flooring.
• If the printer does not have a caster base but is
configured
with optional trays, then lift the printer
o
the
trays. Do not try to lift the printer and the trays at the same time.
• Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
Maintaining the printer 234
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the
options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
• Make sure that your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.
Note: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Maintaining the printer 235
Managing the printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator
information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced
system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded
Web Server — Security: Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Checking the virtual display
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to
be changed or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings menu, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e‑mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.
Managing the printer 236
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status
of the printer, network, and supplies.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web
Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:
• Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
• All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable
alerts can be set for the end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply
conditions.
• The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for
some supply conditions.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3 From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification Description
O The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only The printer generates an e‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of
the supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e‑mail about the status
of the supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop
1
The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user
needs to press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop
1,2
The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply
must be replaced to continue printing.
Managing the printer 237
Notification Description
1
The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2
The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4 Click Submit.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before
restoring the factory default settings. For more information, see
“Printing a menu settings page” on page 53.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the
Wipe All Settings option. For more information, see
“Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 220.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory
default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port
menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a
printer hard disk are not aected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >
Managing the printer 238
Clearing jams
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure that the paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper
• Do not load or remove a tray while the printer is printing.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Do not slide paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
• Make sure that the paper guides are positioned correctly and are not pressing tightly against the paper or
envelopes.
• Push the tray
firmly
into the printer after loading paper.
Clearing jams 239
Use recommended paper
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load paper that is wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled.
• Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
• Make sure that the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
• Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.
Identifying jam locations
Notes:
• When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer
flushes
blank pages or pages with partial prints after a jammed
page is cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.
• When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages.
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
1
2
3
Jam location
1 Automatic document feeder (ADF)
2 Standard bin
3 Front door
4 Multipurpose feeder
5 Duplex unit
6 Trays
7 Rear door
Clearing jams 240
Jam location
8 Finisher rear door
9 Finisher standard bin
Paper jam in the automatic document feeder
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
2 Open the ADF cover.
3 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
4 Close the ADF cover.
Paper jam in the standard bin
Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 241
Paper jam in the rear door
1 Open the rear door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the rear door.
Clearing jams 242
Paper jam in the front door
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
1 Open the front door.
2 Remove the toner cartridge.
Clearing jams 243
3 Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny photoconductor drum under the imaging unit.
Doing so may aect the quality of future print jobs.
4 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
5 Insert the imaging unit.
Note: Use the arrows inside the printer as guides.
Clearing jams 244
6 Insert the toner cartridge.
7 Close the front door.
Paper jam in the duplex unit
1 Remove the tray.
1
Clearing jams 245
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3 Insert the tray.
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder
1 Remove paper from the multipurpose feeder.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3 Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
Clearing jams 246
4 Reload paper, and then adjust the paper guide.
Paper jam in trays
1 Remove the tray.
1
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 247
3 Insert the tray.
Paper jam in the finisher
Paper jam in the
finisher
bin
1 Remove paper from the standard bin.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 248
Paper jam in the finisher rear door
1 Open the finisher rear door.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3 Open the finisher narrow door, and then remove any paper fragments.
4 Close the narrow and rear doors.
Clearing jams 249
Staple jam in the finisher
1 Open the staple access door.
2 Remove the staple cartridge holder.
3 Lift the staple guard, and then remove the loose staples.
Clearing jams 250
4 Close the staple guard.
5 Insert the staple cartridge holder.
6 Close the staple access door.
Clearing jams 251
Troubleshooting
• “Understanding the printer messages” on page 252
• “Solving printer problems” on page 267
• “Solving print problems” on page 275
• “Solving copy problems” on page 302
• “Solving fax problems” on page 306
• “Solving scanner problems” on page 312
• “Solving home screen application problems” on page 317
• “Embedded Web Server does not open” on page 318
• “Contacting customer support” on page 319
Understanding the printer messages
Cartridge low [88.xy]
You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control
panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch [41.xy]
Use only a supported toner cartridge and imaging unit.
Note: For a list of supported supplies, go to
www.lexmark.com.
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]
You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies”
section of the User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the
Paper menu on the control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Tou ch Use current [paper source] to use the available size and type of paper in the current tray or
feeder.
• Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 252
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the
Paper menu on the control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Tou ch Use current [paper source] to use the available paper size and type in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the
Paper menu on the control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Tou ch Use current [paper source] to use the available size and type of paper in the current tray or
feeder.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the
Paper menu on the control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Tou ch Use current [paper source] to use the available size and type of paper in the current tray or
feeder.
• Cancel the print job.
Check tray [x] connection
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
If the error occurs a second time, then:
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the indicated tray.
4 Reattach the tray.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6 Turn the printer back on.
If the error occurs again, then:
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the tray.
4 Contact customer support.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and resume the job.
Troubleshooting 253
Close rear door
Close the rear door of the printer.
Close finisher rear door
Close the rear door of the finisher.
Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.
Close
flatbed
cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]
Try one or more of the following:
• Tou ch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
• Tou ch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last
successful scan job.
• Tou ch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further
for copying, faxing, or e-mailing.
• Tou ch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.
Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:
• The printer firmware has been updated.
• The tray for the print job has been removed.
• The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
• The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a dierent
printer model.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Troubleshooting 254
Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the defective flash memory card.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
Disk full [62]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
Disk must be formatted for use in this device
From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the
files
stored in the printer hard disk.
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:
• Tou ch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Fax memory full
1 From the control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job.
2 Do the following:
• Reduce the fax resolution.
• Reduce the number of pages.
3 Send the fax job.
Troubleshooting 255
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system
support person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support
person.
Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try either of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact
your system support person.
Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact
your system support person.
Imaging unit low [84.xy]
You may need to order a replacement imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control
panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies”
section of the User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 256
Incompatible tray [x] [59]
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the indicated tray.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without
using the indicated tray.
Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then specify the paper size and type in the
Paper menu on the printer control panel.
• Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings.
• Check if the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make
sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
• Check the length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print using a
dierent
tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Insert Tray [x]
Insert the indicated tray into the printer.
Insucient
memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin
collating the rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current print job.
Insucient
memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Insucient
memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.
Insucient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and
continue printing.
Troubleshooting 257
Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control
panel.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that
tray. If the printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it prints from
the default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control
panel.
Note: If the printer
finds
a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If
the printer cannot
find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default
paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer
control panel.
Note: If the printer
finds
a tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, then it feeds from that
tray or feeder. If the printer cannot
find
a tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, then it prints
from the default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the
printer control panel.
Note: If the printer
finds
a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds
from that tray or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size and type of
paper, then it prints from the default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting 258
Load multipurpose feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to
clear the message and continue printing.
• From the control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Load multipurpose feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded
to clear the message and continue printing.
• From the control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Load multipurpose feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
• From the control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to
clear the message and continue printing.
• From the control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Load multipurpose feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to
clear the message and continue printing.
• From the control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 259
Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer
support, and then report the message.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, visit the Lexmark support
Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.
• Install additional printer memory.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
From the control panel, do either of the following:
• Tou ch Continue holding faxes without printing to clear the message.
• Tou ch Attempt to print to restart the printer and continue printing.
Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark
support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
Connect the printer to an analog phone line.
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]
Note: The supply type can be toner cartridge or imaging unit.
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-
party supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging
components. For more information, see
“Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 225.
Troubleshooting 260
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable
results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can aect warranty coverage.
Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your
printer, press and hold
and the # button on the control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds.
If you do not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer and
install a genuine Lexmark supply or part.
Note: For a list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to
www.lexmark.com.
Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
• Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.
Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt for each page to continue printing.
• Tou ch Use current supplies to continue printing using the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the current print job.
Parallel port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the parallel port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Parallel [x] > Parallel Buer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, visit
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.
Remove defective disk [61]
Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.
Troubleshooting 261
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.
Replace all originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
• Tou ch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Tou ch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
• Tou ch Scan from
flatbed
to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful
scan job.
• Tou ch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Tou ch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]
Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s
Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com.
Replace defective imaging unit [31.xy]
Replace the defective imaging unit to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the
User’s Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com.
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the
User’s Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com.
Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
• Tou ch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Tou ch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
• Tou ch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful
scan job.
Troubleshooting 262
• Tou ch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Tou ch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace maintenance kit [80.xy]
The printer is scheduled for maintenance. For more information, go to http://support.lexmark.com or
contact your service representative, and then report the message.
Replace missing imaging unit [31.xy]
Install the missing imaging unit. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
• Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, then install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the toner cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section.
• If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove and reinstall the unresponsive toner cartridge.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then replace the toner cartridge. The
cartridge may be defective or a non‑genuine Lexmark supply. For more information, see
“Using
genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 225.
Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
This error can also be caused by installing a genuine Lexmark cartridge, such as a high yield cartridge, that
is not intended to be used in this product.
The following error codes indicate that a non‑genuine Lexmark toner cartridge is installed:
32.13
32.16
32.19
32.22
32.25
32.28
32.31
32.34
32.37
For more information, see
“Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 225.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to
www.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 263
Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]
Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For
more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
This error can also be caused by installing a genuine Lexmark imaging unit, such as a MICR unit, that is not
intended to be used in this product.
The following error codes indicate that a non‑genuine Lexmark imaging unit is installed:
32.14
32.17
32.20
32.23
32.26
32.29
32.32
32.35
32.38
For more information, see
“Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 225.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to
www.lexmark.com.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.
• From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.
Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover.
Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.
Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem
persists. [840.02]
Try one or more of the following:
• Tou ch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system
support person.
• Tou ch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.
Troubleshooting 264
Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Serial port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the
specified
serial port.
• Make sure Serial
Buer
is not set to Disabled.
• From the printer control panel, set Serial
Buer
to Auto in the Serial [x] menu.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Some held jobs were not restored
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark
support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the
message.
Standard USB port disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > USB Buer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
Troubleshooting 265
Supply needed to complete job
Do either of the following:
• Install the missing supply to complete the job.
• Cancel the current job.
The device is operating in Safe Mode. Some print options may be disabled
or provide unexpected results.
Tou ch Continue to clear the message.
Too many
flash
options installed [58]
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra
flash
memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Too many trays attached [58]
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Unformatted
flash
detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be
replaced.
Unsupported disk
Remove the unsupported printer hard disk, and then insert a supported one.
Troubleshooting 266
Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a
supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
USB port [x] disabled [56]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Notes:
• The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB
Buer
menu is not set to Disabled.
Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Solving printer problems
• “Basic printer problems” on page 267
• “Option problems” on page 270
• “Paper feed problems” on page 273
Basic printer problems
The printer is not responding
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Press the Sleep
button to wake the
printer from Sleep
mode or Hibernate
mode.
Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 267
Action Yes No
Step 3
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and
the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Plug one end of the
power cord into the
printer and the other
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 4
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.
Does other electrical equipment work?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are
inserted in the correct ports.
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?
Go to step 6. Make sure to match
the following:
• The USB symbol
on the cable with
the USB symbol
on the printer
• The appropriate
Ethernet cable
with the Ethernet
port
Step 6
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned o by a switch or
breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned o by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors,
uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Go to step 8.
Step 8
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the
printer and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other
network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 9. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print
server, option, or
other network
device.
Troubleshooting 268
Action Yes No
Step 9
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any
packing material.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
removed?
Go to step 10. Turn o the printer,
remove all packing
materials, then
reinstall the
hardware options,
and then turn on the
printer.
Step 10
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer
driver.
Are the port settings correct?
Go to step 11. Use correct printer
driver settings.
Step 11
Check the installed printer driver.
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Go to step 12. Install the correct
printer driver.
Step 12
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Is the printer working?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Printer display is blank
Action Yes No
Step 1
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Does Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is
solved.
Turn o the printer,
and then contact
customer support.
Troubleshooting 269
Option problems
Cannot detect internal option
Action Yes No
Step 1
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
on the printer.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller
board.
a Turn o the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the
power cord from the electrical outlet.
b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate
connector in the controller board.
c Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly
grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Go to step 3. Connect the internal
option to the
controller board.
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal
option is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the internal
option.
Step 4
a Check if the internal option is selected.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the
printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more
information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver”
on page 48.
b Resend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 270
Tray problems
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
• Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure
that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
b Check if the tray closes properly.
Is the tray working?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a Turn o the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
b Resend the print job.
Is the tray working?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed
in the Installed Features list.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the tray. For
more information,
see the setup
documentation that
came with the tray.
Step 4
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to
make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 48.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 271
Cannot detect memory card
Action Yes No
Make sure the memory card is installed.
a Install the memory card. For more information, see “Installing a
memory card” on page 30.
Note: Check if the memory card is securely connected to the
printer controller board.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the card is listed
in the Installed Options list.
Is the card listed in the Installed Options list?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed.
a Install the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal
Solutions Port” on page 33.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed
in the Installed Features list.
Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?
Go to step 2. Check if you have a
supported ISP.
Note: An ISP from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the ISP connection.
a Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely
connected to the ISP.
b Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected
into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on
the controller board are color‑coded.
Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 272
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed.
a Install the USB or parallel interface card. For more information,
see
“Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 33.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel
interface card is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features
list?
Go to step 2. Check if you have a
supported USB or
parallel interface
card.
Note: A USB or
parallel interface
card from another
printer may not work
on this printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection.
Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely
connected to the USB or parallel interface card.
Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Paper feed problems
Paper frequently jams
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of
the paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
• Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and
type.
b Insert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 273
Action Yes No
Step 2
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
a Review the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see
“Avoiding jams” on page 239.
b Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action Yes No
Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.
a Remove any jammed paper.
b From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the
message.
Does the paper jam message remain?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action Yes No
Turn on Jam Recovery.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
b From the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On
or Auto.
c Touch Submit.
Do pages reprint after a jam?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 274
Solving print problems
Printing problems
Confidential and other held documents do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the control panel, check if the documents appear in the
Held Jobs list.
Note: If the documents are not listed, then print the
documents using the Print and Hold options.
b Print the documents.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
• Delete the print job, and then send it again.
• For PDF files, generate a new file, and then print the
documents.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
the multiple job titles as duplicates.
For Windows users
a Open the Printing Preferences dialog.
b From the Print and Hold section, select Keep duplicate
documents.
c Enter a PIN.
d Resend the print job.
For Macintosh users
a Save and name each job dierently.
b Send the job individually.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
a Delete some held jobs to free up printer memory.
b Resend the print job.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Troubleshooting 275
Action Yes No
Step 5
a Add printer memory.
b Resend the print job.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Error message about reading the flash drive appears
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear
USB port.
Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?
Go to step 2. Insert the flash drive
into the front USB
port.
Step 2
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking
green.
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
Is the indicator light blinking green?
Wait until the printer
is ready, then view
the held jobs list, and
then print the
documents.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
a Check for an error message on the display.
b Clear the message.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives,
see
“Supported
flash
drives and
file
types” on page 81.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.
Does the error message still appear?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 276
Incorrect characters print
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn o
the printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace
mode.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Deactivate Hex
Trace mode.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
b Resend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper
size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, open Printing
Preferences or the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
a Check if the trays are not linked.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 277
Large jobs do not collate
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set
Collate to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).”
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a From the printer software, set Collate to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).”
Note: Setting Collate to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2)” in the software
overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number
and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the
number of pages in the job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed
all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with
Adobe Acrobat.
b Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
Do the
files
print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
b Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.
Do the files print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Printing slows down
Notes:
• When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the
fuser.
Troubleshooting 278
• The printer speed may be reduced when printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated
temperatures.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the
fuser type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and
a 220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
b Resend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a Replace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser,
see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
b Resend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Print jobs do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog
and check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must
select the printer for each document that you want to print.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready
appears on the printer display.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the
message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Troubleshooting 279
Action Yes No
Step 4
a Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if
the cables are securely connected to the computer and the
printer.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation
that came with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
a Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
a Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
information, see
“Installing the printer software” on page 48.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Print job takes longer than expected
Action Yes No
Step 1
Change the environmental settings of the printer.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings
b Select Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select
O
.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the
consumption of energy or supplies, or both.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity
of images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then
resend the job
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 280
Action Yes No
Step 3
a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
a Disable the Page Protect feature.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect
> O
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server
are secure. For more information, see the setup documentation
that came with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Tray linking does not work
Notes:
• The trays can detect paper length.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the
Paper Size/Type menu.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the
same size and type.
• Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for
the size of the paper loaded in each tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 281
Action Yes No
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be
linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be
linked.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Unexpected page breaks occur
Action Yes No
Increase the printing timeout.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
b Increase the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.
c Resend the print job.
Did the
file
print correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Check the original
file for manual page
breaks.
Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
Troubleshooting 282
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Print a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are
supported by the printer.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2 Touc h PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
b Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that
you want to use. For more information, contact your system
support person.
c Resend the print job.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven
edges?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that
you want to use on your computer. For more information,
contact your system support person.
b Resend the print job.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven
edges?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Printer is printing blank pages
Troubleshooting 283
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Check if the packing material is properly removed from the
imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Clipped pages or images
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Troubleshooting 284
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded
in the tray.
• Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper size
specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size
from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge.
2 Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 285
Prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected
Note: This problem occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain the
highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended.
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the printer control panel, make sure the paper type setting
is set to Transparency.
Is the paper type setting correct?
Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
Transparency.
Step 2
Reduce the toner darkness, and then resend the print job.
Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Make sure you are using a recommended type of color
transparency, and then resend the print job.
Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Shadow images appear on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Go to step 2. Load paper with the
correct paper type
and weight in the
tray.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
loaded in the tray to
match the paper type
and weight specified
in the tray settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 286
Action Yes No
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Gray background on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if Allow Background Removal is set to O.
a From the General Settings menu, set Allow Background
Removal to On.
b Resend the print job.
Did the background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Adjust the toner darkness to a lighter setting.
a From the Quality Menu, select a lower value to reduce toner
density.
• 4 is the factory default setting.
• If Print Mode is set to Black Only, then a setting of 5
increases toner density and darkness for all print jobs.
b Resend the print job.
Did the background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Reinstall the toner cartridge.
a Remove the cartridge.
b Install the cartridge.
c Resend the print job.
Did the background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Troubleshooting 287
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check if o-white background is selected.
a Depending on your operating system, set o-white
background from Print Properties or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Did the background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Incorrect margins on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the paper size loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu
to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded
in the tray.
• Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper size
specified
in the
tray settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size
from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 288
Paper curl
Action Yes No
Step 1
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Go to step 2. Adjust the width and
length guides.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the
paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper
type and weight from
the tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Print irregularities
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Troubleshooting 289
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper
loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper
size and type from
the tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Contact
customer
support at
http://support.lexm
ark.com or your
service
representative.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 290
Repeating defects appear on prints
Action Yes No
Step 1
Measure the distance between the defects.
Check for a distance between the defects that equals:
• 97 mm (3.82 in.)
• 47 mm (1.85 in.)
• 38 mm (1.5 in.)
Is the distance between defects equal to one of the listed
measurements?
Go to step 2.
1 Check if the
distance
between the
defects equal to
80 mm (3.15 in.)
2 Take note of the
distance, and
then contact
customer
support at
http://support.l
exmark.com or
your service
representative.
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do the repeating defects still appear?
Contact
customer
support at
http://support.lexm
ark.com or your
service
representative.
The problem is
solved.
Print is too dark
Troubleshooting 291
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the
toner darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
• Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
• Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper type,
texture and
weight specified
in the tray
settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel,
change the texture
settings in the Paper
Texture menu to
match the paper you
are printing on.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 292
Action Yes No
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Print is too light
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase
the toner darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
type, texture, and
weight to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel,
change the texture
settings in the Paper
Texture menu to
match the paper you
are printing on.
Go to step 5.
Troubleshooting 293
Action Yes No
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 7. The problem is
solved.
Step 7
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Skewed print
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 294
Action Yes No
Step 2
a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the
tray.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Printer is printing solid black pages
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 295
Transparency print quality is poor
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
Transparency.
Step 2
a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder
from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the
paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
type and weight to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 296
Action Yes No
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 297
Action Yes No
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
• Specify the paper
texture, type, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
• Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper
texture, type, and
weight specified
in the tray
settings.
Step 3
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support at
http://support.lexm
ark.com or your
service
representative.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 298
Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of
paper.
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 299
Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight
in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of
paper.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 300
Toner specks appear on prints
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do toner specks appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
Reinstall the imaging unit.
a Remove, and then install the imaging unit.
b Resend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support at
http://support.lexm
ark.com or your
service
representative.
The problem is
solved.
Toner rubs o
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABC
DEF
Troubleshooting 301
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper
type, texture, and weight.
Do the paper type, texture, and weight match the paper loaded in
the tray?
Go to step 2. Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the tray
settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 2
Resend the print job.
Does the toner still rub o?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Uneven print density
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print density uneven?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Solving copy problems
• “Copier does not respond” on page 303
• “Scanner unit does not close” on page 303
• “Poor copy quality” on page 303
• “Partial document or photo copies” on page 305
Troubleshooting 302
Copier does not respond
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 3. Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 3
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
it back on.
Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Scanner unit does not close
Action Yes No
Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and
the printer.
a Lift the scanner unit.
b Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close properly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Poor copy quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Go to step 3. Increase the scan
resolution setting for
a higher‑quality
output.
Troubleshooting 303
Action Yes No
Step 3
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and
the ADF glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Go to step 4. See
“Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 224.
Step 4
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
a From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
b From the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.
c If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Go to step 5. See
“Print quality
problems” on
page 282.
Step 5
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 6. Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Step 6
Increase the scan resolution setting for a higher‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Check the copy settings.
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content
Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Go to step 8. Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Step 8
Check for patterns on print.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > select
a lower setting
b On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is being selected.
Do patterns appear on prints?
Go to step 9. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 304
Action Yes No
Step 9
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b Adjust the settings:
• Improve sharpness—Increase the sharpness setting.
• Remove background—Reduce the current background
removal setting.
• Increase contrast—Increase the current setting.
• Decrease shadow—Reduce the current setting.
Do prints have missing or faded text?
Go to step 10. The problem is
solved.
Step 10
Check for washed‑out or overexposed output.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b Adjust the settings of the following:
• Background removal—Reduce the current setting.
• Shadow detail—Reduce the current background removal
setting.
c Resend the copy job.
Do pages show washed‑out or overexposed prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Partial document or photo copies
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 2. Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Step 2
Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper
loaded in the tray.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the
Paper Size setting.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in
the tray.
Go to step 3. Change the paper
size setting to match
the paper loaded in
the tray, or load the
tray with paper that
matches the paper
size setting.
Troubleshooting 305
Action Yes No
Step 3
a Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system,
specify the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print
dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do copies print properly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Solving fax problems
• “Fax and e-mail functions are not set up” on page 306
• “Caller ID is not shown” on page 307
• “Cannot send or receive a fax” on page 307
• “Can send but not receive faxes” on page 310
• “Can receive but not send faxes” on page 310
• “Received fax has poor print quality” on page 311
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
Notes:
• Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
• The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e‑mail.
Action Yes No
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Ye s >
Submit
b Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer
display.
c Select a language, and then touch .
d Select a country or region, and then touch Next.
e Select a time zone, and then touch Next.
f Select Fax and E‑mail, and then touch Next.
Are fax and e‑mail functions set up?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 306
Caller ID is not shown
Action Yes No
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line
is subscribed to the caller ID service.
Notes:
• If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you
may have to change the default setting. There are two
settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).
• The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends
on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID
patterns.
• Contact your telephone company to determine which
pattern or switch setting to use.
Does the caller ID appear?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Cannot send or receive a fax
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Is there an error or status message on the display?
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 3. Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 3
Check the power.
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready
appears on the display.
Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?
Go to step 4. Turn on the printer,
and then wait until
Ready appears on
the display.
Step 4
Check the printer connections.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following
equipment are secure:
• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine
Are the cable connections secure?
Go to step 5. Securely connect
the cables.
Troubleshooting 307
Action Yes No
Step 5
a Check the telephone wall jack.
1 Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a dierent telephone
cable into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone
cable into a
dierent
wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall
jack.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the
correct digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be
connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can
be used.
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect
the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port)
on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to
request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router
that will support analog use. For more information, contact
your DSL provider.
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure
you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If
none exists, then consider installing an analog telephone
line for the fax machine.
Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct
digital connector?
Go to step 7. Connect the printer
to an analog phone
service or the correct
digital connector.
Troubleshooting 308
Action Yes No
Step 7
Check for a dial tone.
Did you hear a dial tone?
Go to step 8.
• Try calling the fax
number to make
sure that it is
working properly.
• If the telephone
line is being used
by another
device, then wait
until the other
device is finished
before sending a
fax.
• If you are using
the On Hook Dial
feature, then turn
up the volume to
check if you hear
a dial tone.
Step 8
Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters)
between the printer and the telephone line, and then try sending
or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 9.
Step 9
a Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily
disabling call waiting.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 10.
Step 10
a Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information,
contact your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then
consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 11.
Step 11
Scan the original document one page at a time.
a Dial the fax number.
b Scan the document one page at a time.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 309
Can send but not receive faxes
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the ring count delay settings.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it
to load the Web page correctly.
b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you
want the phone to ring before the printer answers.
d Click Submit.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Can receive but not send faxes
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax
mode, and then send the fax.
Note: The Multi Send application does not support the XPS
output type. To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 310
Action Yes No
Step 2
Load the original document properly.
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the
ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left
corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies,
photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the
ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Set up the shortcut number properly.
• Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone
number that you want to dial.
• Dial the telephone number manually.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Received fax has poor print quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
a Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
b Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
c Resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 311
Action Yes No
Step 2
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it
to load the Web page correctly.
• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and
then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 14400
• 33600
d Click Submit, and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge.
When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the
cartridge, and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Solving scanner problems
• “The scanner does not respond” on page 313
• “Scan job was not successful” on page 314
• “Scanner unit does not close” on page 315
• “Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer” on page 315
• “Poor scanned image quality” on page 315
• “Partial document or photo scans” on page 316
• “Cannot scan from a computer” on page 317
Troubleshooting 312
The scanner does not respond
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and
the computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 3. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print
server, option, or
other network
device.
Step 3
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 4
Check if the electrical outlet is turned o by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned o by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors,
uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.
Are the other electrical equipment working?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment
and turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment
and then go to step
6.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Are the printer and scanner working?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 313
Scan job was not successful
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the cable connections.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to
the computer and the printer.
Are the cables securely connected?
Go to step 2. Connect the cables
properly.
Step 2
Check if the file name is already in use.
Is the file name already in use?
Change the file
name.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another
application or being used by another user.
Is the
file
you want to scan open in another application or being
used by another user?
Close the file you are
scanning.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing
file check box is selected in the destination configuration settings.
Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box
selected in the destination configuration settings?
Go to step 5. Select the Append
time stamp or
Overwrite existing
file check box in the
destination
configuration
settings.
Step 5
From the Flash Drive menu, reduce the scan resolution settings,
and then resend the scan job.
Does the job scan?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Check the scan settings.
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and
Content Source settings are correct for the document being
scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
The problem is
solved.
Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Troubleshooting 314
Scanner unit does not close
Action Yes No
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.
a Lift the scanner unit.
b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Select a lower scan resolution.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Poor scanned image quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error message appears on the display.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Go to step 3. Increase the scan
resolution settings
for a higher‑quality
output.
Step 3
Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint‑free
cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Go to step 4. See
“Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 224.
Troubleshooting 315
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 5. Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Step 5
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
• From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
• From the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.
• When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Go to step 6. See
“Print quality
problems” on
page 282.
Step 6
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?
Problem solved. Go to step 7.
Step 7
Check the scan settings.
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and
Content Source settings are correct for the document being
scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Contact
customer
support.
Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Partial document or photo scans
Action Yes No
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Contact
customer
support.
Load the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Troubleshooting 316
Cannot scan from a computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the
printer display before scanning a job.
Does Ready appear before scanning the job?
Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check the cable connections between the printer and the print
server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server
secure?
Contact
customer
support.
Tighten the cable
connections.
Solving home screen application problems
An application error has occurred
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the system log for relevant details.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer home screen.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and
then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
b Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab >
Log.
c From the Filter menu, select an application status.
d From the Application menu, select an application, and then
click Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Go to step 2. Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 317
Action Yes No
Step 2
Resolve the error.
Is the application working now?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Turn on the printer.
b Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
c Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
a View the printer IP address:
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page,
and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
b Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address.
Note: Depending on the network settings, you may need to
type “https://” instead of “http://” before the printer IP
address to access the Embedded Web Server.
c Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the network is working.
a Print a network setup page.
b Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm
that the status is Connected.
Note: If the status is Not Connected, then the connection
may be intermittent, or the network cable may be defective.
Contact your system support person for a solution, and then
print another network setup page.
c Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
d Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Troubleshooting 318
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are
secure.
a Connect the cables properly. For more information, see the
setup documentation that came with the printer.
b Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
c Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain
Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Contact your system
support person.
Contacting customer support
Before contacting customer support, make sure to have the following information:
• Printer problem
• Error message
• Printer model type and serial number
Go to
http://support.lexmark.com to receive e‑mail or chat support, or browse through the library of manuals,
support documentation, drivers, and other downloads.
Technical support via telephone is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries
or regions, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 319
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark MX610de, MX611de, MX611dhe, MX617de
Machine type:
7016
Model(s):
630, 670, 675
Edition notice
June 2017
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local
law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the
products or the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to
make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is
not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be
used instead. Evaluation and
verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services,
except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit
www.lexmark.com.
© 2017 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is
defined
in 48
C.F.R. 2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are
used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software
Documentation are licensed to the U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only
those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices 320
Trademarks
Lexmark, the Lexmark logo, MarkNet, AccuRead, and MarkVision are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Lexmark International, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Google Cloud Print is a trademark of Google Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies
in the United States and other countries.
Mopria®, the Mopria® logo, and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s
designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer
is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used
in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a
product of Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation
Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford Arthur Baker
Notices 321
Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Tay Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information
statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment o and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dierent from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing
device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach
or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a
violation of FCC regulations.
Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services
Lexmark International, Inc.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, KY 40550
(859) 232–3000
Notices 322
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO
9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 55 (one-sided); 54 (two-sided)
Scanning 55
Copying 56
Ready N/A
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping temperature -40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
Storage temperature and relative humidity 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
8 to 80% RH
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the
European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com for your
local sales
oce
phone number.
India E-Waste notice
This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011, which prohibit use of
lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in
concentrations exceeding 0.1％ by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in
Schedule II of the Rules.
Notices 323
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local
authorities for disposal and recycling options.
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching
the metal frame of the printer.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is
certified
to
comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped
by Lexmark.
Laser notice
The printer is
certified
in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for
Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is
certified
as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements
of IEC 60825-1: 2014.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser
that is nominally a 12‑milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655–675 nanometers. The
laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I
level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be
axed
to this printer as shown:
Notices 324
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner ernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und oener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην
ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode Description Power consumption
(Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs. 640 (one-sided); 460 (two-
sided)
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original
documents.
660
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. 35
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 20
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 3.5
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.4
O The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is
turned o.
0
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements.
Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See
www.lexmark.com for current values.
Notices 325
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by
lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged
after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 20
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response
time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more
energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in
Hibernate Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
• Using the Hibernate Timeout
• Using the Schedule Power modes
• Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be
modified
between one hour and one month.
O mode
If this product has an o mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product
power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are
provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends
in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's
energy usage.
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Standard ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux
équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
Notices 326
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation
software CD.
日本の VCCI 規定
製品にこのマークが表示されている場合、次の要件を満たしています。
この装置は、クラス B 情報技術装置です。この装置は、家庭環境で使用することを目的としていますが、この
装置がラジオやテレビジョン受信機に近接して使用されると、受信障害を引き起こすことがあります。
取扱説明書に従って正しい取り扱いをしてください。
VCCI-B
Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative
Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other
information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided
to your telephone company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply
with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and
modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is
also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to
a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number
of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone
company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier
that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point
(for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company
will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the
FCC.
Notices 327
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could
aect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in
order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. at
www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark
International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state taris. Contact the state public utility commission, public
service commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of
this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm
equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to
customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide
problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which
this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified
by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized
safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local
lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time
it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the
telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number
provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance
transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical
specifications.
The Ringer Equivalence Number
(REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface.
The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that
the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the
equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to
customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been
identified
as a major nationwide
problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which
this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified
by UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized
safety
certification
body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local
lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Notices 328
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence
number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant
être connectés à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés
n’est pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro
REN du modem est indiqué sur l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là
d’un problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un
parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur
répondant à des caractéristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL
(Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région ou pays. Ceci prévient tout
endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item
of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions
for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any
sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another
item of telepermitted equipment of a dierent make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible
with all of Telecom's network services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the eective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same
line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the
equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following
limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single
manual call initiation, and
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt
and the beginning of the next call attempt.
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to dierent numbers are spaced such that there
is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Japanese telecom notice
The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certified
by JATE, with Certification Number A11-0160001.
Notices 329
Lexmark International, Inc.
LEX-M03-002
A11-0160001JP
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone
filter
(Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which
receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The
filter
must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog
telephone lines in Switzerland.
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un
filtre
de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark :
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être
utilisé pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark
Teilenummer 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen
werden. Die Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee
che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti
su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU,
2009/125/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage
limits, the ecodesign of energy-related products, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances
in electrical and electronic equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön
fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the
Notices 330
Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative or may be obtained at
www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and EN55032 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1 or
EN 62368-1.
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher
Suites for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with
SHA-256/382 and AES Galois Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B
Profile
for Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to
Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in
the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites
for TLS implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic
Curve Digital Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version
1 (IKEv1) implemented in the product or service.
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER
PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the
country-specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale,
from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Notices 331
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for
repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the
product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or
option with the product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to
that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this
statement to that user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12
months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with
the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser
Units, Transfer/Transport Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is
available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance”
message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to
deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark
designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the
Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of
the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a
repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal
obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the
latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized
products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized
use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable
storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area
contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer
covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Notices 332
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of
prints produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS
OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND
SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW
ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL
APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT
TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance
or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover
actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the
product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or
damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL
LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER
ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the
possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's
and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers
are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not
apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Notices 333
Index
Numerics
250‑sheet tray
installing 44
550‑sheet tray
installing 44
A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 21
Active NIC menu 144
adapter plug 113
adding hardware options
print driver 48
adding internal options
print driver 48
ADF
copying using 85
ADF separator roller
ordering 227
adjusting copy quality 90
adjusting printer display
brightness 217
adjusting Sleep mode 216
adjusting toner darkness 78
administrator settings
Embedded Web Server 236
advanced options
fax 124
FTP 95
FTP options 131
advanced options, touch‑screen
e‑mail 103
AirPrint
using 79
answering machine
setting up 105
AppleTalk menu 149
applications
home screen 23
understanding 22
attaching cables 47
available internal options 28
avoiding jams 73
avoiding paper jams 239
B
blocking junk faxes 121
buttons, printer control panel 16
buttons, touch screen
using 19
C
cables
Ethernet 47
USB 47
canceling a print job
from the computer 84
from the printer control
panel 84
canceling an e-mail 101
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 318
Card Copy
setting up 24
card stock
loading, multipurpose
feeder 60
tips 70
Cartridge low [88.xy] 252
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 252
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 252
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch
[41.xy] 252
Change [paper source] to
[custom string] load
[orientation] 253
Change [paper source] to
[custom type name] load
[orientation] 252
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 253
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 253
changing output file type
e‑mailing 100
changing port settings
internal solutions port 52
Check tray [x] connection 253
checking an unresponsive
printer 267
checking status of parts and
supplies 225
checking the status of parts and
supplies 225
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 236
cleaning
exterior of the printer 223
interior of the printer 223
scanner glass 224
cleaning the printer 223
Close finisher rear door 254
Close
flatbed
cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 254
Close front door 254
Close rear door 254
collate
copy options 95
collating copies 90
color quality troubleshooting
prints on color transparencies
appear dark when
projected 286
Complex page, some data may
not have printed [39] 254
confidential data
information on securing 222
confidential
jobs
modifying print settings 83
confidential print jobs 82
Confidential
Print menu 159
Configuration
change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 254
configuration information
wireless network 49
Configure MP menu 136
configuring
supply
notifications,
imaging
unit 237
supply notifications,
maintenance kit 237
supply
notifications,
toner
cartridge 237
configuring e‑mail settings 97
configuring port settings 52
configuring
supply
notifications
237
Index 334
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 116
connecting to a wireless network
using PIN (Personal
Identification Number)
method 51
using Push Button Configuration
method 51
using the Embedded Web
Server 52
using wireless setup wizard 50
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 217
Eco‑Mode 214
Hibernate mode 216
Hibernate Timeout 216
Quiet Mode 215
Schedule Power Modes 217
Sleep Mode 216
conserving supplies 214
contacting customer support 319
content
e‑mail settings 102
content source
e‑mail settings 102
fax options 123
content type
e‑mail settings 102
fax options 123
control panel, printer 16
indicator light 16
Sleep button light 16
controller board
accessing 29
copies
copy options 95
copy job, canceling
using the ADF 93
using the scanner glass 93
copy options
collate 95
copies 95
darkness 94
save as shortcut 95
sides (duplex) 95
copy quality
adjusting 90
copy screen
content source 95
content type 95
options 94
Copy Settings menu 171
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 303
partial document or photo
copies 305
poor copy quality 303
poor scanned image quality 315
scanner unit does not
close 303, 315
copying
adding an overlay message 93
adjusting quality 90
canceling a copy job 93, 94
collating copies 90
custom job 92
dierent paper sizes 88
enlarging 89
inserting a header or footer 93
multiple pages on one sheet 91
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 89
on letterhead 87
on transparencies 86
photos 86
placing separator sheets
between copies 91
quick copy 85
reducing 89
selecting a tray 88
to a dierent size 87
using the ADF 85
using the scanner glass 86
copying dierent paper sizes 88
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 91
copying on both sides of the
paper (duplexing) 89
copying on transparencies 86
creating a fax destination
shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 119
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 125
creating custom name
paper type 66
creating profiles
using the ScanBack Utility 129
custom name
configuring 67
Custom Names menu 141
custom paper type name
assigning 67
Custom Scan Sizes menu 142
Custom Type [x]
changing paper type 67
creating custom name 66
Custom Types menu 141
customer support
contacting 319
D
darkness
copy options 94
e‑mail options 101
fax options 123
scan options 130
date and time, fax
setting 116
daylight saving time, setting 116
Default Source menu 133
Defective flash detected [51] 255
delayed send
fax options 124
dierent paper sizes, copying 88
digital subscriber line (DSL)
fax setup 109
digital telephone service
fax setup 112
directory list
printing 84
Disk full 62 255
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 255
disk wiping 220
display troubleshooting
printer display is blank 269
display, printer control panel 16
adjusting brightness 217
disposing of printer hard
disk 219
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 116
documents, printing
from a computer 78
from a mobile device 79, 80
DSL filter 109
duplexing 89
E
Eco‑Mode setting 214
Edit Security Setups menu 157
Index 335
Embedded Web Server
accessing 14, 21
adjusting brightness 217
administrator settings 236
checking the status of
parts 225
checking the status of
supplies 225
creating a fax destination
shortcut 119
creating an FTP shortcut 125
creating e‑mail shortcuts 98
functions 14
initial fax setup 104
modifying confidential print
settings 83
networking settings 236
problem accessing 318
scanning to a computer
using 127
setting up e‑mail alerts 236
using 14
Embedded Web Server —
Security: Administrator's Guide
where to find 236
Embedded Web Server—
Security: Administrator’s Guide
where to find 222
emission
notices 322, 323, 326, 327
encrypting the printer hard
disk 221
enlarging a copy 89
envelopes
loading, multipurpose
feeder 60
tips on using 69
environmental settings
Eco‑Mode 214
Hibernate mode 216
Hibernate Timeout 216
printer display brightness,
adjusting 217
Quiet Mode 215
Schedule Power Modes 217
Sleep Mode 216
Erase Temporary Data Files
menu 160
erasing hard disk memory 220
erasing non‑volatile
memory 220
erasing volatile memory 219
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 255
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 255
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 49
Ethernet port 47
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 49
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 27
e‑mail
canceling 101
e‑mail alerts
low supply levels 236
paper jam 236
setting up 236
e‑mail function
setting up 97
e‑mail options
darkness 101
message 101
original size 101
page setup 102
recipient(s) 101
resolution 101
Send As 102
subject 101
e‑mail screen
advanced options 103
options 101, 103
E‑mail Settings menu 186
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 98
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 99
using the address book 100
e‑mailing
adding message line 100
adding subject line 100
configuring e‑mail settings 97
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 98
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 98
setting up e‑mail function 97
using a shortcut number 99
using the address book 100
using the printer control
panel 99
F
factory defaults
restoring 238
fax
sending 118
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 306
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 306
fax log
viewing 121
Fax memory full 255
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 175
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 184
fax name, setting 116
fax number, setting 116
fax options
content source 123
content type 123
darkness 123
delayed send 124
page setup 124
resolution 123
scan preview 124
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 256
fax screen
advanced options 124
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 256
fax setup
country‑ or region‑specific 113
digital telephone service 112
DSL connection 109
standard telephone line
connection 105
VoIP 110
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 256
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 256
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 307
Index 336
can receive but not send
faxes 310
can send but not receive
faxes 310
cannot send or receive a
fax 307
received fax has poor print
quality 311
faxing
blocking junk faxes 121
canceling a fax job 121
changing resolution 120
configuring the printer to
observe daylight saving
time 116
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 119
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 120
fax setup 104
forwarding faxes 122
holding faxes 122
making a fax lighter or
darker 120
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 119
sending using the printer
control panel 117
setting the date and time 116
setting the fax number 116
setting the outgoing fax
name 116
viewing a fax log 121
FCC notices 322, 327
file name
scan options 129
finding more information about
the printer 10
finding printer IP address 21
finisher
finishing features 76
supported paper sizes 76
finisher features 76
Finishing menu 203
firmware card 28
flash drive
printing from 80
Flash Drive menu 196
flash drives
supported file types 81
font sample list
printing 83
Forms and Favorites
setting up 23
forwarding faxes 122
FTP
FTP options 129
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 126
FTP address, scanning to
using a shortcut number 126
using the printer control
panel 126
FTP options
advanced options 131
FTP 129
FTP screen
advanced options 95
FTP Settings menu 191
G
General Settings menu 164
Google Cloud Print
using 79
green settings
Eco‑Mode 214
Hibernate mode 216
Hibernate Timeout 216
Quiet Mode 215
Schedule Power Modes 217
H
hardware options, adding
print driver 48
held jobs 82
printing from a Macintosh
computer 83
printing from Windows 83
held print jobs
printing from a Macintosh
computer 83
printing from Windows 83
Help menu 213
Hibernate mode
using 216
Hibernate Timeout
setting 216
hiding icons on the home
screen 22
holding faxes 122
home screen
customizing 22
hiding icons 22
showing icons 22
home screen applications
configuring 23
finding information 23
home screen buttons and icons
description 17
HTML menu 211
I
icons on the home screen
hiding 22
showing 22
identifying jam locations 240
Image menu 212
imaging unit
ordering 227
replacing 230
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 256
Imaging unit nearly low
[84.xy] 256
Imaging unit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 256
importing a
configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 27
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 257
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 257
initial fax setup 104
using the Embedded Web
Server 104
Insert Tray [x] 257
inserting a header or footer 93
installing an Internal Solutions
Port 33
installing an optional card 32
installing options
order of installation 44
installing printer hard disk 40
installing the 250‑sheet tray 44
installing the 550‑sheet tray 44
installing the printer software 48
Insucient memory to collate job
[37] 257
Insucient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 257
Insucient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 257
Insucient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored [37] 257
Index 337
internal options 28
internal options, adding
print driver 48
Internal Solutions Port
installing 33
troubleshooting 272
IP address of computer
finding 21
IP address, printer
finding 21
IPv6 menu 148
J
jam, clearing
finisher 250
jams
avoiding 239
jams, clearing
in the automatic document
feeder 241
in the duplex unit 245
in the finisher 248
in the standard bin 241
multipurpose feeder 246
trays 247
Job Accounting menu 205
L
labels, paper
tips 70
letterhead
copying on 87
loading, multipurpose
feeder 60
tips on using 69
Lexmark Mobile Print
using 80
light, indicator 16
line
filter
109
linking trays 66, 67
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 258
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] [paper
orientation] 258
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 258
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 258
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom string] [paper
orientation] 259
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom type name] [paper
orientation] 259
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper size] [paper
orientation] 259
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 259
loading
multipurpose feeder 60
trays 55
loading the optional tray 55
loading the standard tray 55
M
maintenance kit
ordering 227
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 259
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 260
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 260
making copies using paper from
selected tray 88
memory
types installed on printer 219
memory card 28
installing 30
troubleshooting 272
Memory full [38] 260
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 260
menu settings page
printing 53
menus
Active NIC 144
AppleTalk 149
Confidential Print 159
Configure
MP 136
Copy Settings 171
Custom Names 141
Custom Scan Sizes 142
Custom Types 141
Default Source 133
Edit Security Setups 157
Erase Temporary Data Files 160
E‑mail Settings 186
Fax Mode (Analog Fax
Setup) 175
Fax Mode (Fax Server
Setup) 184
Finishing 203
Flash Drive 196
FTP Settings 191
General Settings 164
Help 213
HTML 211
Image 212
IPv6 148
Job Accounting 205
list of 132
Miscellaneous Security
Settings 158
Network [x] 144
Network Card 146
Network Reports 146
OCR Settings 201
Paper Loading 140
Paper Size/Type 133
Paper Texture 137
Paper Weight 138
Parallel [x] 151
PCL Emul 209
PDF 208
PostScript 208
Quality 205
Reports 143
Security Audit Log 160
Serial [x] 153
Set Date/Time 162
Settings 201
SMTP Setup menu 156
Standard Network 144
Standard USB 150
Substitute Size 137
TCP/IP 146
Universal Setup 142
Utilities 207
Wireless 148
XPS 208
message
e‑mail options 101
Miscellaneous Security Settings
menu 158
mobile device
printing from 79, 80
Mopria Print Service
using 79
moving the printer 11, 234
Index 338
Multi Send
adding a profile 25
setting up 25
multipurpose feeder
loading 60
MyShortcut
about 24
N
Network [x] menu 144
Network [x] software error
[54] 260
Network Card menu 146
Network Reports menu 146
network settings
Embedded Web Server 236
network setup page
printing 54
Networking Guide
where to find 236
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 260
noise emission levels 323
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 260
non‑volatile memory 219
erasing 220
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 261
notices 322, 323, 324, 325,
326, 327, 328, 329, 330
number of remaining pages
estimate 225
O
OCR Settings menu 201
optional card
installing 32
optional tray
loading 55
options
250‑sheet tray, installing 44
550‑sheet tray, installing 44
firmware cards 28
Internal Solutions Port,
installing 33
memory card 30
memory cards 28
printer hard disk, installing 40
printer hard disk, removing 43
options, copy screen
copy from 94
scale 94
options, touch‑screen
copy 94
e‑mail 101, 103
ordering
imaging unit 227
maintenance kit 227
staple cartridges 227
ordering supplies
toner cartridges 226
original size
e‑mail options 101
scan options 130
output file type
changing 100
scan image 130
P
page setup
e‑mail options 102
fax options 124
scan options 131
paper
characteristics 71
dierent sizes, copying 88
letterhead 72
loading, multipurpose
feeder 60
preprinted forms 72
recycled 73
saving 91
selecting 72
storing 73
unacceptable 72
Universal size setting 55
using recycled 214
Paper changes needed 261
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 274
paper jam in front door 243
paper jam in the automatic
document feeder 241
paper jam in the duplex unit 245
paper jam in the finisher 248
paper jam in the multipurpose
feeder 246
paper jam in the rear door 242
paper jam in trays 247
paper jam, clearing
in front door 243
in the automatic document
feeder 241
in the duplex unit 245
in the rear door 242
multipurpose feeder 246
trays 247
paper jams
avoiding 239
paper jams, clearing
in the standard bin 241
paper labels
loading, multipurpose
feeder 60
Paper Loading menu 140
paper size
setting 55
Paper Size/Type menu 133
paper sizes
supported 74
paper stop, using 65
Paper Texture menu 137
paper type
setting 55
paper types
supported by printer 75
where to load 75
Paper Weight menu 138
paper weights
supported by printer 75
Parallel [x] menu 151
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 261
parts
checking status 225
checking, from printer control
panel 225
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 225
using genuine Lexmark 225
PCL Emul menu 209
PDF menu 208
Personal Identification Number
method
using 51
phone splitter 110
photos
copying 86
placing separator sheets
between copies 91
port settings
configuring 52
Index 339
PostScript menu 208
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 49
print driver
hardware options, adding 48
print irregularities 289
print job
canceling from the
computer 84
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 224
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 283
characters have jagged
edges 282
clipped pages or images 284
gray background on prints 287
horizontal voids appear on
prints 299
print irregularities 289
print is too dark 291
print is too light 293
printer is printing solid black
pages 295
repeating print defects appear
on prints 291
shadow images appear on
prints 286
skewed print 294
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 296
streaked vertical lines 297
toner fog or background
shading 301
toner rubs o 301
toner specks appear on
prints 301
transparency print quality is
poor 296
uneven print density 302
white streaks 300
print troubleshooting
confidential and other held
documents do not print 275
error reading flash drive 276
incorrect characters print 277
incorrect margins on prints 288
jammed pages are not
reprinted 274
job prints from wrong tray 277
job prints on wrong paper 277
jobs do not print 279
Large jobs do not collate 278
multiple‑language PDF files do
not print 278
paper curl 289
paper frequently jams 273
print job takes longer than
expected 280
tray linking does not work 281
unexpected page breaks
occur 282
printer
basic model 12
finishing features 76
fully configured 12
minimum clearances 11
moving 11, 234
selecting a location 11
shipping 235
printer configurations 12
printer control panel 16
adjusting brightness 217
factory defaults, restoring 238
indicator light 16
Sleep button light 16
printer control panel, virtual
display
using the Embedded Web
Server 236
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 261
printer hard disk
disposing of 219
encrypting 221
installing 40
removing 43
wiping 220
printer hard disk encryption 221
printer hard disk memory
erasing 220
printer information
where to find 10
printer IP address
finding 21
printer is printing blank
pages 283
printer messages
Cartridge low [88.xy] 252
Cartridge nearly low
[88.xy] 252
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 252
Cartridge, imaging unit
mismatch [41.xy] 252
Change [paper source] to
[custom string] load
[orientation] 253
Change [paper source] to
[custom type name] load
[orientation] 252
Change [paper source] to
[paper size] load
[orientation] 253
Change [paper source] to
[paper type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 253
Check tray [x] connection 253
Close finisher rear door 254
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 254
Close front door 254
Close rear door 254
Complex page, some data may
not have printed [39] 254
Configuration change, some
held jobs were not restored
[57] 254
Defective flash detected
[51] 255
Disk full 62 255
Disk must be formatted for use
in this device 255
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 255
Error reading USB drive.
Remove USB. 255
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 255
Fax memory full 255
Fax partition inoperative.
Contact system
administrator. 256
Fax server 'To Format' not set
up. Contact system
administrator. 256
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 256
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 256
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 256
Index 340
Imaging unit nearly low
[84.xy] 256
Imaging unit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 256
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 257
Incorrect paper size, open
[paper source] [34] 257
Insert Tray [x] 257
Insucient memory to collate
job [37] 257
Insucient memory to support
Resource Save feature
[35] 257
Insucient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 257
Insucient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored
[37] 257
Load [paper source] with
[custom string] [paper
orientation] 258
Load [paper source] with
[custom type name [paper
orientation] 258
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 258
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 258
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom string] [paper
orientation] 259
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom type name] [paper
orientation] 259
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper size] [paper
orientation] 259
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 259
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 259
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 260
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 260
Memory full [38] 260
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 260
Network [x] software error
[54] 260
No analog phone line
connected to modem, fax is
disabled. 260
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 260
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 261
Paper changes needed 261
Parallel port [x] disabled
[56] 261
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 261
Reinstall missing or
unresponsive cartridge
[31.xy] 263
Remove defective disk [61] 261
Remove paper from standard
output bin 262
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 262
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 262
Replace defective imaging unit
[31.xy] 262
Replace imaging unit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 262
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 262
Replace maintenance kit
[80.xy] 263
Replace missing imaging unit
[31.xy] 263
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 263
Replace unsupported imaging
unit [32.xy] 264
Restore held jobs? 264
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 264
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 264
Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if
problem persists.
[840.02] 264
Scanner jam, remove all
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 265
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 265
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 265
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 265
Some held jobs were not
restored 265
Standard network software
error [54] 265
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 265
Supply needed to complete
job 266
The device is operating in safe
mode. Some print options may
be disabled or provide
unexpected results. 266
Too many flash options installed
[58] 266
Too many trays attached
[58] 266
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 266
Unsupported disk 266
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 267
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 255
USB port [x] disabled [56] 267
Weblink server not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 267
printer options troubleshooting
internal option is not
detected 270
Internal Solutions Port 272
memory card 272
tray problems 271
USB/parallel interface card 273
printer problems, solving
basic 267
printer security
information on 222
printer software, installing 48
printing
canceling, from the printer
control panel 84
directory list 84
font sample list 83
forms 78
from a computer 78
Index 341
from a mobile device 79
from flash drive 80
menu settings page 53
network setup page 54
printing a directory list 84
printing a font sample list 83
printing a menu settings page 53
printing a network setup
page 54
printing forms 78
printing from a flash drive 80
printing held jobs
from a Macintosh computer 83
from Windows 83
printing slows down 278
publications
where to find 10
Push Button Configuration
method
using 51
Q
Quality menu 205
Quiet Mode 215
R
recipient(s)
e‑mail options 101
recycled paper
using 73, 214
recycling
Lexmark packaging 218
Lexmark products 218
toner cartridges 218
reducing a copy 89
reducing noise 215
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 263
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 26
Remove defective disk [61] 261
Remove paper from standard
output bin 262
removing printer hard disk 43
repeat print jobs 82
printing from a Macintosh
computer 83
printing from Windows 83
repeating print defects appear on
prints 291
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 262
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 262
Replace defective imaging unit
[31.xy] 262
Replace imaging unit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 262
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 262
Replace maintenance kit
[80.xy] 263
Replace missing imaging unit
[31.xy] 263
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 263
Replace unsupported imaging
unit [32.xy] 264
replacing
imaging unit 230
toner cartridge 228
replacing supplies
staple cartridge 232
replacing the staple
cartridge 232
reports
viewing 237
Reports menu 143
reserve print jobs 82
printing from a Macintosh
computer 83
printing from Windows 83
resolution
e‑mail options 101
fax options 123
scan options 130
resolution, fax
changing 120
Restore held jobs? 264
restoring factory default
settings 238
RJ11 adapter 113
S
safety information 7, 8, 9
save as shortcut
copy options 95
scan options 130
saving paper 91
scan image
output file type 130
scan options
darkness 130
file name 129
original size 130
page setup 131
resolution 130
save as shortcut 130
scan preview 131
Send As 130
scan preview
fax options 124
scan options 131
scan screen
content source 130
content type 130
Scan to Computer
setting up 128
Scan to Network
setting up 25
using 125
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a
computer 317
partial document or photo
scans 316
scan job was not successful 314
scanner unit does not
close 303, 315
scanning takes too long or
freezes the computer 315
ScanBack Utility
using 129
scanner
automatic document feeder
(ADF) 15
functions 15
scanner glass 15
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 264
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 264
Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. [840.02] 264
scanner glass
cleaning 224
copying using 86
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 265
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 265
Index 342
scanning
from a flash drive 128
quick copy 85
to a computer using the
Embedded Web Server 127
to an FTP address 126
scanning to a computer 128
using the Embedded Web
Server 127
scanning to a flash drive 128
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 125
using a shortcut number 126
using the address book 126
using the printer control
panel 126
scanning to network
destinations 125
Schedule Power Modes
using 217
security
modifying confidential print
settings 83
Security Audit Log menu 160
security slot 47
security Web page
printer security information 222
selecting a location for the
printer 11
selecting paper 72
Send As
e‑mail options 102
scan options 130
sending a fax using the
computer 117
sending a fax using the printer
control panel 117
sending an e‑mail using the
printer control panel 99
sending fax
using shortcuts 118
using the address book 118
sending fax at a scheduled
time 119
sending fax using the address
book 118
Serial [x] menu 153
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 265
serial printing
setting up 53
Set Date/Time menu 162
setting
TCP/IP address 146
setting Hibernate Timeout 216
setting the fax number 116
setting the outgoing fax
name 116
setting the paper size 55
setting the paper type 55
setting the Universal paper
size 55
setting up e‑mail alerts 236
setting up fax
country‑ or region‑specific 113
digital telephone service 112
DSL connection 109
standard telephone line
connection 105
VoIP connection 110
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 306
setting up serial printing 53
Settings menu 201
shipping the printer 235
shortcuts, creating
e‑mail 98
fax destination 119, 120
FTP address 126
FTP destination 125
showing icons on the home
screen 22
sides (duplex)
copy options 95
Sleep Mode
adjusting 216
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 265
SMTP Setup menu 156
Some held jobs were not
restored 265
standard bin, using 65
Standard Network menu 144
Standard network software error
54] 265
standard tray
loading 55
Standard USB menu 150
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 265
staple cartridge
replacing 232
staple cartridges
ordering 227
staple jam in the finisher 250
staple jam, clearing
finisher 250
statement of volatility 219
status of parts
checking 225
status of supplies
checking 225
storing
paper 73
supplies 228
storing print jobs 82
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 296
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 297
streaks appear 300
subject and message
information
adding to e‑mail 100
Substitute Size menu 137
supplies
checking status 225
checking, from printer control
panel 225
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 225
conserving 214
storing 228
using genuine Lexmark 225
using recycled paper 214
supplies, ordering
ADF separator roller 227
imaging unit 227
maintenance kit 227
staple cartridges 227
toner cartridges 226
Supply needed to complete
job 266
supply notifications
configuring 237
supported flash drives 81
supported paper sizes 74
T
TCP/IP menu 146
telecommunication
notices 327, 328, 329, 330
The device is operating in safe
mode. Some print options may
be disabled or provide
unexpected results. 266
Index 343
the scanner does not
respond 313
tips
card stock 70
labels, paper 70
letterhead 69
on using envelopes 69
transparencies 69
tips on using envelopes 69
toner cartridge
replacing 228
toner cartridges
ordering 226
recycling 218
toner darkness
adjusting 78
Too many flash options installed
[58] 266
Too many trays attached
[58] 266
touch screen
buttons 19
transparencies
copying on 86
loading, multipurpose
feeder 60
tips 69
trays
linking 66, 67
loading 55
unlinking 66, 67
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 317
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 318
checking an unresponsive
printer 267
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 306
solving basic printer
problems 267
the scanner does not
respond 313
troubleshooting, color quality
prints on color transparencies
appear dark when
projected 286
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 303
partial document or photo
copies 305
poor copy quality 303
poor scanned image quality 315
scanner unit does not
close 303, 315
troubleshooting, display
printer display is blank 269
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 307
can receive but not send
faxes 310
can send but not receive
faxes 310
cannot send or receive a
fax 307
received fax has poor print
quality 311
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 274
troubleshooting, print
confidential and other held
documents do not print 275
error reading flash drive 276
incorrect characters print 277
incorrect margins on prints 288
jammed pages are not
reprinted 274
job prints from wrong tray 277
job prints on wrong paper 277
jobs do not print 279
Large jobs do not collate 278
multiple‑language PDF files do
not print 278
paper curl 289
paper frequently jams 273
print job takes longer than
expected 280
tray linking does not work 281
unexpected page breaks
occur 282
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 283
characters have jagged
edges 282
clipped pages or images 284
gray background on prints 287
horizontal voids appear on
prints 299
print irregularities 289
print is too dark 291
print is too light 293
printer is printing solid black
pages 295
repeating print defects appear
on prints 291
shadow images appear on
prints 286
skewed print 294
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 296
streaked vertical lines 297
toner fog or background
shading 301
toner rubs o 301
toner specks appear on
prints 301
transparency print quality is
poor 296
uneven print density 302
white streaks on a page 300
troubleshooting, printer options
internal option is not
detected 270
Internal Solutions Port 272
memory card 272
tray problems 271
USB/parallel interface card 273
troubleshooting, printing
printing slows down 278
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a
computer 317
partial document or photo
scans 316
scan job was not successful 314
scanner unit does not
close 303, 315
scanning takes too long or
freezes the computer 315
U
unacceptable paper 72
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 17
uneven print density 302
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 266
Universal Paper Size
setting 55
Universal paper size
setting 55
Universal Setup menu 142
unlinking trays 66, 67
Index 344
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 267
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 255
USB port 47
USB port [x] disabled [56] 267
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 273
using a shortcut number
scanning to an FTP
address 126
using Forms and Favorites 78
using Hibernate mode 216
using recycled paper 214
using Schedule Power
Modes 217
using shortcuts
sending fax 118
using the address book 100
sending fax 118
using the Embedded Web
Server 14
using the ScanBack Utility 129
using the touch‑screen
buttons 19
Utilities menu 207
V
verify print jobs 82
printing from a Macintosh
computer 83
printing from Windows 83
vertical voids appear 300
viewing
reports 237
viewing a fax log 121
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 236
voice mail
setting up 105
voice over Internet Protocol
(VoIP)
fax setup 110
voids appear 300
VoIP adapter 110
volatile memory 219
erasing 219
volatility
statement of 219
W
Weblink server not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 267
wiping the printer hard disk 220
Wireless menu 148
wireless network
configuration information 49
wireless network setup
using the Embedded Web
Server 52
wireless setup wizard
using 50
X
XPS menu 208
Index 345
… 304 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Lexmark MX610 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Lexmark MX610 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 11,63 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Lexmark MX610

Lexmark MX610 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 346 pagina's

Lexmark MX610 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 354 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info